JP5919221B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  Further, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and draws the extracted random number value for each role. Based on the internal lottery table in which the values are specified, it is determined whether or not it is allowed to have a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery”), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is determined. The reels are controlled to stop based on the combination that is allowed to be aligned on the active line (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the player's stop button operation, and the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination is effective. Stop display on the line.

  At this time, if no winning combination is won in the internal lottery (that is, “losing”), the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is displayed no matter what timing the stop button is operated. Not. In addition, depending on the combination determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to the combination will not be stopped and displayed on the active line, or at any timing the stop button Even if the operation is performed, there is a combination in which the combination of symbols related to the combination is displayed on the active line in a stopped manner. Further, depending on the combination determined as the internal winning combination, there is a combination in which a combination of symbols related to the combination is not displayed unless the operation sequence of the plurality of stop buttons is an appropriate operation sequence.

  In other words, if it is determined that a combination that does not stop and display a combination of symbols related to a combination on the active line unless the stop button is operated at an appropriate timing or in an appropriate operation sequence is determined as an internal winning combination. The player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button because the stop operation is required in the timing and the appropriate operation order.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, the game machine shifts to a relatively advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”) Is done. Here, the specific state is a bonus game (“RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, “CB (Challenge Bonus)” that improves the probability that the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. ) "" MB (Middle Bonus) "etc.) and the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination is not displayed unless the stop button is operated in the proper operation order (or when multiple internal winning combinations are winning simultaneously) (A combination of symbols that is relatively unfavorable to the player is displayed) When a specific internal winning combination is determined, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as an appropriate stop button operation order) is notified. "AT"), the re-game allowed to start the game is determined as an internal winning combination by operating the start lever without performing the game value input operation Probability replay time to improve that (hereinafter also referred to as "RT"), assist replay time that AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ART"), and the like. Therefore, the player plays the game while desiring to shift to a relatively advantageous state for the player.

  Recently, in such a gaming machine, the number of games until the operation in the specific state is allowed is determined by lottery, and the operation in the specific state is allowed based on the determined number of games being played. A gaming machine is known (for example, Patent Document 1). Such a gaming machine is specified when the number of games determined by lottery is played and when a predetermined value is set for the value of the notification counter and when an internal winning combination related to operation in a specific state is determined. Control which notifies the operation order of the stop button in which the combination of the symbols concerning the operation of the state is displayed in a stopped manner is performed. Then, when a specific internal winning combination is determined by activating the specific state until the specific state ends, the order of stop operations in which a combination of symbols related to the specific internal winning combination is displayed Is notified.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, in the lottery table for determining the number of games until the operation in the specific state is permitted, the operation of the ART is permitted in a period when the probability that the operation in the specific state is permitted is high. Therefore, the player expects that the operation of the specific state is allowed during the period when the operation of the specific state is high, and has an interest in the game. Can be improved.

JP 2011-245201 A

  However, when such a gaming machine has passed a period in which the probability that the transition to the specific state is permitted is high, the player can play the game until the period in which the transition to the next specific state is permitted is high. The game may end without continuing. Then, the gaming machine after the period when the probability that the transition to the specific state is allowed is high is ended becomes an empty base, and other players must start the game from the period when the probability that the transition of the ART is allowed is low. In many cases, he / she is shy away from playing in the empty space. For this reason, there arises a problem that the operation of the subsequent gaming machine remains lowered.

  In view of such problems, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation of the gaming machine even after the period when the probability that the transition to the specific state is allowed is high is over. And

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each circumferential surface, and a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surfaces of the plurality of reels. Among them, the symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols, the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player, and the winning operation based on the fact that the start operation by the player is detected by the start operation detecting means. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination, and a symbol variation for displaying the plurality of symbols in a variable manner by rotating the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the player by the start operation detecting unit. A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation by the player, and a stop operation by the player detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, stop control means for performing stop control of the symbols variably displayed by the symbol varying means, and all the variation display of the plurality of symbols by the stop control means Based on the suspension, a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game information notification means for notifying information relating to a game, and the game information notification means are controlled. When a specific winning combination is determined by the game information notification control unit, the specific state control unit that controls the specific state in which information related to the specific winning combination is notified, and the number of games a game number counting means for counting, game number up shifts to the specific condition based on the plurality defined specific state allowable game number determination table, controlled by the specific state control means A specific state allowable game number determining means for determining a game number up to the transition to a particular state is allowed to be, an operation detection means for detecting a predetermined operation by the player, by the operation detection unit in a non-gaming, Based on the detection of a predetermined operation by the player, it is tentatively determined to determine again the number of games until the transition to the specific state determined by the specific state allowable game number determination means is allowed. In a state in which it is provisionally determined that the number of games until the transition to the specific state is allowed to be determined again by the specific state allowable game number temporary determination unit and the specific state allowable game number temporary determination unit, Based on the fact that the cancel operation is detected by the operation detecting means until the start operation by the player is detected by the start operation detecting means, the specific state allowable game number provisional decision Canceling means for canceling the provisional determination of the number of games until the transition to the specific state is allowed by the determining means, and the specific state by the specific state allowable game number temporary determining means In a state where the number of games until the transition to is allowed is temporarily determined, the start operation detecting means detects the start operation by the player, the specific state allowable game number determination table and Are different tables, and based on the specific state allowable game number redetermination table in which a plurality of games until the transition to the specific state are defined, the number of games until the transition to the specific state is permitted is again determined. And a specific state allowable game number re-determination means to be determined.

  Here, the “specific state” can be appropriately set as long as it is a state that is relatively advantageous to the player, such as ART, AT, BB, RB, CB, and MB.

  The operation detecting means can be set as appropriate as long as it can detect a predetermined operation by the player. For example, a 1 BET button, a MAX-BET button, a start lever, a stop button, an effect button, a cross key, and the like can be applied.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game information notification control means performs control to notify the game information notification means that a predetermined operation by the player has been detected by the operation detection means. .

  Here, the game information notification means can be appropriately set as long as it can notify that a predetermined operation by the player has been detected. For example, a lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like can be applied.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation of the gaming machine even after the period when the probability that the transition to the specific state is allowed is high is over.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows an example of a design code table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "05". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "06". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "07". It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transfer table. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning area table. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT0. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT1. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT2. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT3. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT4. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT5. It is a figure which shows an example of a rotation effect table. It is a figure which shows an example of a spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation block tables 1-3. It is a figure which shows an example of production block tables 4-9. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 1-10. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 11-20. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 21-31. It is a figure which shows an example of the turning effect production execution tables 1-9. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation effect production execution tables 10-19. It is a figure which shows a pulse data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition diagram managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a state management table. It is a figure which shows an example of a pushing order alerting | reporting effect determination table. FIG. 11 shows an example of an effect determination table 1. FIG. 11 shows an example of the effect determination table 2. FIG. 11 shows an example of the effect determination table 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table for reset. It is a figure which shows an example of a self-releasing mode lottery probability transfer table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lot drawing table in Bonus state B. It is a figure which shows an example of a navigation stock addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table in Bonus state A. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation stock lottery table for ART game number determination states. It is a figure which shows the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the medal acceptance start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the medal management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the injection | throwing-in / out sensor check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the payout process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT0 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT1 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT2 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT3 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT5 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the rotation effect setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the spinning drum effect process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the rotation direction update process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation phase execution frequency acquisition process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the pulse counter correction process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the excitation image setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the excitation execution frequency confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer waiting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the main board | substrate communication task in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the sound control task in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the lamp control task in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the image control task in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the production content determination process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the power-on command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the setting change apparatus operation | movement start / end command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the reel rotation start reception command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the Bonus preparation state transfer game number reset process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for normal states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for precursor stage in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for self-releasing modes in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus state in ART in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for ART games in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for ART game number determination states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for an ART game number addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the red 7, blue 7, and follow replay display in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of BAR replay display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the RUSH replay display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the blank display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the mother task in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the selection menu execution process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which shows the possibility of reset of the number of Bonus preparation state transfer games. It is FIG. 1 which shows the operation | movement of the reel at the time of a spinning effect. It is FIG. 2 which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of a spinning effect. It is FIG. 3 which shows the operation | movement of the reel at the time of a spinning effect. It is FIG. 4 which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of a spinning effect. It is FIG. 5 which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of a spinning effect. It is FIG. 1 which shows the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of reset of the number of Bonus preparation state transfer games. It is FIG. 2 which shows the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of reset of the number of Bonus preparation state transfer games. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when resetting the number of Bonus preparation state transition games. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the number of Bonus preparation state transition games is reset. It is a figure which shows the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device after reset of the number of Bonus preparation state transfer games.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2, hinge mechanism 2a, front door 3)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. Moreover, the front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a provided on the front left side of the cabinet 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 4)
The key hole 4 is provided on the central right side of the front door 3 and is provided for locking and unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked and locked. First, a special key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 of the front door 3 to unlock it, and the front door 3 is opened to perform maintenance work, change of setting values, and the like. Then, when the maintenance work, the change of the set value, and the like are finished, a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 of the front door 3 and locked.

(Side lamps 5a, 5b)
The side lamps 5a and 5b are provided at the left and right ends of the front door 3 when viewed from the front, and incorporate high-intensity light emitting diodes. The side lamps 5a and 5b are designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision, and will be described later at predetermined timings such as during an ART state, during a predetermined performance, and during a demonstration. An effect is performed by performing lighting or blinking control by the sub-control board 400. Hereinafter, the side lamps 5a and 5b may be collectively referred to as “side lamp 5”.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the right side of a cross key 19 to be described later and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(1BET button 7)
The 1BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 23, which will be described later, and is provided to use one medal out of credited medals for a game.

(MAX-BET button 8)
The MAX-BET button 8 is provided on the right side of the 1BET button 7 in front view, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game among the credited medals. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game (one game) is three. In the following description, the 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 may be collectively referred to as “BET buttons 7, 8”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the left side of the start lever 10 to be described later, and is provided for settlement of credited medals out of medals acquired by the player. Further, it is provided for returning medals used in one game when the player operates the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 by mistake. In the present embodiment, the maximum creditable number is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the right side of the checkout button 9 when viewed from the front, and is provided to detect a game start operation by the player. Here, based on the detection of the start operation, a random value is extracted by a main control board 300 described later, and rotation of a left reel 17a, a middle reel 17b, and a right reel 17c described later is started. Further, the grip ball portion of the start lever 10 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a start lever effect lamp 42 described later is built in the grip ball portion. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs lighting / flashing control of the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player's vision is performed.

(Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13, stop button unit 14)
The left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are provided on the right side of the start lever 10 as viewed from the front, and are unitized by a stop button unit 14. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later, by the player. ing. Hereinafter, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be collectively referred to as "stop buttons 11, 12, 13".

(Return button 15)
The return button 15 is provided on the right side of the stop button unit 14 when viewed from the front. The return button 15 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 16 described later.

(Selector 16)
The selector 16 is provided inside the medal insertion slot 6 and is provided for determining whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate. The selector 16 is provided with a medal sensor 16s for detecting the passage of an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is an appropriate medal, the appropriate medal is guided to the hopper 520 described later by the hopper guide member 522 described later. To do. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, the medal payout outlet 33 discharges the medal through the guide member 523 described later.

(Left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, right reel 17c, reel unit 17d)
The left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are provided inside the cabinet 2, and each has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. Yes. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotationally driven by exciting stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. In this embodiment, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are unitized by a reel unit 17d, and the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c can be easily attached to and detached from the gaming machine 1. It has become. Hereinafter, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c may be collectively referred to as “reel 17”.

(Direction button 18)
The effect button 18 is provided on the right side of the MAX-BET button 8 when viewed from the front. When a player's operation is detected during a predetermined effect, the sub-control board 400 described later causes the liquid crystal display device 41 described later. Control. The 1BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 can be shared with the effect button 18 without providing the effect button 18. In this case, a command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 based on the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8, and the sub-control board 400 receives a liquid crystal display based on the reception of the command. The device 41 is controlled. As a result, there is no need to provide a separate production button 18, and the number of parts can be reduced.

(Cross key 19)
The cross key 19 is provided on the right side of the effect button 18 as viewed from the front. The cross key 19 can be pressed in at least two directions (usually four directions), and is provided to accept an operation by the player.

(Panel 20, display window 21)
The panel 20 includes an effect lamps 22a to 22j, a start lamp 23, a BET lamps 24a to 24c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throwable display unit 28, and a replay display. It is provided to display the lamp 29 and the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. In addition, the panel 20 is provided with a display window 21 for making a left reel 17a, a middle reel 17b, and a right reel 17c, which will be described later, visible.

(Direction lamps 22a-22j)
The effect lamps 22a to 22j are provided on the back side of the transmissive portions at the left and right ends of the panel 20, and emit light under predetermined conditions to notify the current state (for example, ART state) and the like. Is provided. The effect lamps 22 a to 22 e are provided on the left side of the display window 21 in front view, and the effect lamps 22 f to 22 j are provided on the right side of the display window 21 in front view. In the following description, the effect lamps 22a to 22j may be collectively referred to as “effect lamp 22”.

(Start lamp 23)
The start lamp 23 is provided above the 1BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation of the start lever 10 can be accepted. Specifically, when three medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, or when the MAX-BET button 8 is operated with the number of stored medals being three or more, the start lever 10 is turned on to notify that it is possible to accept the start operation.

(BET lamps 24a-24c)
The BET lamps 24a to 24c are provided on the right side of the start lamp 23 when viewed from the front, and are provided to notify the number of inserted medals used in the game. Specifically, when the number of medals used for a game is one, the BET lamp 24a is lit, and when the number of medals used for a game is two, the BET lamp 24b is lit. When the number of medals used in the game is three, the BET lamp 24c is turned on. In the following description, the BET lamps 24a to 24c may be collectively referred to as “BET lamp 24”.

(Storage number indicator 25)
The stored number indicator 25 is provided on the right side of the BET lamp 24 when viewed from the front. Further, the stored number display unit 25 is provided for displaying the number of stored medal medals of the player and stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Game state display lamps 26a and 26b)
The game state display lamps 26 a and 26 b are provided on the right side of the stored number display unit 25 in front view. In addition, the gaming state display lamps 26a and 26b are notified of the current gaming state by performing light emission control by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, the game state display lamps 26a and 26b may be collectively referred to as “game state display lamps 26”.

(Payout number display 27)
The payout number display device 27 is provided on the right side of the game state display lamp 26b in front view. The payout number display 27 is paid out in accordance with the number of medals inserted into the medal slot 6 or the combination of symbols arranged on the activated line activated by operating the 1 BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8. It is provided to display the number of medals to be paid out. Here, in the present embodiment, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a among the three symbols of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c displayed on the display window 21; Only the lower right line connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b and the symbol displayed in the lower stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is regarded as an effective line.

  In the following, a line that connects a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a, a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 17b, and a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “upper” or Sometimes referred to as “upper line”. Further, a line connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “middle stage” or “middle stage line”. May be written. In addition, a line connecting the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 17c is a “lower” or “lower line” May be written. Also, a line that connects the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “upward to the right” or “right” It may be described as “rising line”.

(Putable indicator lamp 28)
The insertable display lamp 28 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 27 as viewed from the front. Further, by turning on the insertable display lamp 28, it is notified that the medals inserted into the medal slot 6 can be stored, and by turning off the insertable display lamp 28, the medal slot 6 is displayed. It is informed that it is impossible to store medals thrown in.

  In this embodiment, since the maximum number of credits that can be credited is “50”, the main control board 300 to be described later can be inserted when the number of stored medals is less than “50”. 28 is turned on, and when the number of stored medals is “50”, the insertion ready display lamp 28 is turned off. In addition, when the combination of symbols related to replay to be described later is displayed on the active line, control is performed to turn off the displayable display lamp 28.

(Replay display lamp 29)
The replay display lamp 29 is provided below the thrown-in display lamp 28. The re-game display lamp 29 is lit when a combination of symbols related to re-game to be described later is displayed on the active line. This notifies the player that the combination of symbols related to “re-game” has been displayed on the active line. That is, the player is also informed that the next game can be performed without using a medal.

(Stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c)
The stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c are provided below the display window 21. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 30a is provided at the lower part of the left reel 17a, the stop operation order display lamp 30b is provided at the lower part of the middle reel 17b, and the stop operation order display lamp 30c is The lower reel 17c is provided below. In addition, the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c are used to indicate the optimal stop operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300 described later. It is provided to notify the person. Specifically, when it is the optimal timing to stop the left stop button 11, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30a is turned on or blinked, and the intermediate stop button 12 is stopped at the optimal timing. In some cases, the stop operation order display lamp 30b is turned on or blinked, and when the right stop button 13 is operated at the optimum timing, the stop operation order display lamp 30c is turned on or blinked for notification. I do.

(Lumbar panel 31)
The waist panel 31 is provided below the stop button unit 14 and is provided for allowing the player to recognize a model name, a motif, and the like. Specifically, a picture of an appearing character is drawn. In addition, a light (not shown) is provided on the back of the waist panel 31, and by controlling the light emission by a sub-control board 400, which will be described later, it is easy for the player to recognize the model name and motif of the gaming machine 1. ing.

(Tray receiving unit 32)
The tray unit 32 is provided at the lower part of the waist panel 31 and is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout outlet 33 described later.

(Medal payout exit 33)
The medal payout port 33 is provided to discharge medals paid out by the hopper 520 when the hopper 520 described later is driven when paying out medals based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. It has been. Further, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, or when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited, the medal insertion is performed. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the mouth 6 to the tray unit 32 through the medal payout port 33.

  Here, when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited, for example, when the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotating, or when a combination of symbols relating to replay is displayed on the active line. Say.

(Lower speakers 34a and 34b)
The lower speakers 34a and 34b are provided on both the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 33, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects and the like when performing an effect. Hereinafter, the lower speakers 34a and 34b may be collectively referred to as “lower speaker 34”.

(Upper speakers 35a, 35b)
The upper speakers 35a and 35b are provided on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 41, which will be described later, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect, as with the speakers 34a and 34b. Yes. Hereinafter, the upper speakers 35a and 35b may be collectively referred to as “upper speaker 35”, and the lower speakers 34a and 34b and the upper speakers 35a and 35b may be collectively referred to as “speakers 34 and 35”. There is a case.

(Setting display section 36)
The setting display unit 36 is provided for displaying the current setting value. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a key hole (not shown) and is rotated by a predetermined angle, the main control board 300 displays the currently set value on the setting display unit 36. I do.

(Setting change button 37)
The setting change button 37 is provided for changing the setting value. Here, as a method of changing the set value, first, a setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle with the key inserted therein. Next, the setting value is switched and displayed on the setting display unit 36 by operating the setting change button 37. Then, by operating the setting change button 37, when the value to be determined as the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 36, the start lever 10 can be operated to insert and remove the rotated setting changing key. The set value is changed by performing an operation to return to a proper angle.

  In the present embodiment, six setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are provided, and the setting change button 37 is operated while “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Then, “2” is displayed on the setting display section 36, and thereafter, each time the setting change button 37 is operated, the set value is added and displayed by “1”. However, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36.

(Liquid crystal display device 41)
The liquid crystal display device 41 is provided above the reel 17 to provide an effect of displaying moving images, still images, and the like. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 41 is provided for notifying information related to the result of the internal lottery process described later, or notifying information necessary for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to winning on the active line. It has been.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the reel 17, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. Details of the main control board 300 will be described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the upper rear surface of the front door 3 and is provided for controlling the liquid crystal display device 41 and the speakers 34 and 35. Details of the sub control board 400 will be described later.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and is provided for supplying a voltage to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 520)
The hopper 520 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Further, the hopper 520 is driven and controlled based on a predetermined signal from a main control board 300 described later. The power supply board 500 described later determines whether or not a predetermined number of medals have been discharged by a medal sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper, and determines that a predetermined number of medals have been discharged. Then, a signal indicating that the payout has been completed is transmitted to the main control board 300. Thereby, the main control board 300 described later can recognize that the payout has been completed.

(Discharge slit 521)
The discharge slit 521 is provided in the hopper 520 and is provided to discharge medals from the hopper 520.

(Hopper guide member 522)
When the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is an appropriate medal, the hopper guide member 522 receives the determined medal in the hopper 520 provided in the cabinet 2. It is provided to guide you to.

(Guide member 523)
When a foreign object is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when it is determined that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, the guide member 523 receives a medal determined as not being an appropriate medal. It is provided to guide the medal payout exit 33.

(Discharge guide member 524)
The payout guide member 524 is provided to guide the medals discharged from the discharge slit 521 of the hopper 520 to the medal payout outlet 33 side of the tray unit 32.

(Auxiliary storage unit 530)
The auxiliary storage unit 530 is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 520 overflow.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a reel control board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Main control board 300)
A main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305 are connected to the main control board 300.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 reads a program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby causing the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500 to be processed. A predetermined signal is transmitted.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table such as a winning area determination table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for storing various data determined by execution of programs by the main CPU 301. Further, the main RAM 303 has a role of temporarily storing calculation results and the like by the main CPU 301.

(Random number generator 304)
The random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number for determining a winning area or the like. Here, in the present embodiment, the random number generator 304 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(IF circuit 305)
An I / F (interface) circuit 305 is a circuit for transmitting and receiving commands between the main control board 300, the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500.

(Relay board 200)
The relay board 200 includes a 1BET switch 7sw, a MAX-BET switch 8sw, a checkout switch 9sw, a start switch 10sw, a left stop switch 11sw, a middle stop switch 12sw, a right stop switch 13sw, a medal sensor 16s, a start lamp 23, and a BET lamp 24. The stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the insertion possible display lamp 28, the re-game display lamp 29, the setting display unit 36, and the setting change switch 37sw are connected.

(1BET switch 7sw)
The 1BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use one medal from medals stored by the player based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(MAX-BET switch 8sw)
The MAX-BET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player. Further, when the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. . Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use three medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. In the following description, the 1BET switch 7sw and the MAX-BET switch 8sw may be collectively referred to as “BET switches 7sw, 8sw”.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9 by the player. Further, when an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. The main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating that the stored medal is to be returned to the hopper 520 of the power supply board 500 based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The stored medals are returned.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. Further, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for starting the rotation of the reel 17 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11 by the player. When the operation of the left stop button 11 by the player is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the rotating left reel 17a.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player. Further, when the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the rotating middle reel 17b.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player. Further, when the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the rotating right reel 17c. Hereinafter, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw may be collectively referred to as “stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw”.

  In the present embodiment, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are provided so that the ON / OFF of the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be detected. Therefore, when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated by the player (ON edge), and after the player operates the stop button 11, 12, 13, the player's finger is moved to the stop button 11, 12, 13 (OFF edge) is provided so as to be detected.

(Medal sensor 16s)
The medal sensor 16 s is a sensor for detecting that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 has passed through the selector 16. In addition, when the medal sensor 16s detects a normal medal passage, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control when the medal is inserted based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Setting change switch 37sw)
The setting change switch 37sw is a switch for detecting that the setting change button 37 has been operated. Further, when the operation of the setting change button 37 is detected by the setting change switch 37sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to switch and display the setting value on the setting display unit 36 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Power supply board 500)
A power supply device 510, a hopper 520, and an auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s are connected to the power supply substrate 500.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 is provided with a power switch 511 sw and a reset switch 512 sw, and these switches are connected to the power supply substrate 500 via the power supply device 510.

(Power switch 511sw)
The power switch 511sw is a switch for detecting that the power button 511 has been operated by a store clerk or the like of an amusement store. Further, when an operation by a store clerk or the like of the game store is detected by the power switch 511sw, the power supply board 500 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Further, the power switch 511sw supplies a voltage to the entire gaming machine 1 based on the detection of an operation by a store clerk or the like of the gaming store.

(Reset switch 512sw)
The reset switch 512sw is a switch for detecting that the reset button 512 is operated by a store clerk or the like of the amusement store. Further, when an operation by a store clerk or the like is detected by the reset switch 512sw, the power supply board 500 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Thereby, the output of the error signal or the like can be stopped and the error state can be recovered.

(Auxiliary storage part full tank sensor 530s)
The auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530s is a sensor for detecting that the number of medals stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530 exceeds a predetermined number. In addition, when the auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s detects that the number of medals stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530 exceeds a predetermined number, the power supply board 500 supports the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. A signal indicating that the number of medals stored in the storage unit 530 has exceeded a predetermined number is output. When the main control board 300 receives a signal indicating that the number of medals stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530 exceeds a predetermined number, control is performed to display a predetermined error. If the error is displayed, the player calls the game store clerk, and after the game store clerk collects the medals, the error state is released by operating the reset button 512, and the game is possible. Return to the correct state.

(Reel control board 100)
To the reel control board 100, stepping motors 101, 102, 103, a left reel sensor 111s, a middle reel sensor 112s, and a right reel sensor 113s are connected.

(Stepping motors 101, 102, 103)
The stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are provided for rotationally driving the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c. Further, the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 is transmitted to the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. As a result, each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c rotate at a constant angle. The main CPU 301 manages the rotation angles of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c by counting the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 after detecting the reel index. To do.

(Left reel sensor 111s)
The left reel sensor 111s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the left reel 17a has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

(Medium reel sensor 112s)
The middle reel sensor 112s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the middle reel 17b has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

(Right reel sensor 113s)
The right reel sensor 113s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the right reel 17c has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is a board mainly for controlling effects. The sub control board 400 includes an effect control board 410, an image control board 420, a sound control board 430, a side lamp 5, an effect button detection switch 18sw, a cross key detection switch 19sw, an effect lamp 22, and a stop operation sequence display lamp. 30 and a start lever effect lamp 42 are connected.

(Production button detection switch 18sw)
The effect button detection switch 18sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the effect button 18 by the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, the sub control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the effect button 18 by the player.

(Cross key detection switch 19sw)
The cross key detection switch 19sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the cross key 19 by the player. When the operation of the cross key 19 by the player is detected by the cross key detection switch 19sw, the sub-control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the cross key 19 by the player.

(Start lever effect lamp 42)
The start lever effect lamp 42 is composed of a high-intensity light-emitting diode, and is provided to perform an effect visually appealing to the player based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, in the internal lottery process described later, the sub-control board 400 controls lighting / flashing of the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition such as a case where a predetermined winning area is won is satisfied. I do.

(Production control board 410)
The effect control board 410 is a board for mainly controlling the side lamp 5, the effect button detection switch 18sw, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 during the effect. The effect control board 410 is connected to an I / F (interface) circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a random number generator 413, a sub ROM 414, and a sub RAM 415.

(I / F circuit 411)
The I / F (interface) circuit 411 is provided for receiving signals from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300.

(Sub CPU 412)
The sub CPU 412 reads an effect program stored in the sub ROM 414, and performs a predetermined calculation based on a command from the main control board 300, an input signal of the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the cross key detection switch 19sw. In order to supply the result of the calculation to the image control board 420 or the sound control board 430, it is provided.

(Random number generator 413)
The random number generator 413 is provided to generate a random number used when determining an effect or the like performed by the liquid crystal display device 41, the speakers 34, 35, and the like. The random number generator 413 is provided to generate a random number for determining the number of games to be added to the ART state or the number of games in the ART state.

(Sub ROM 414)
The sub ROM 414 is provided for storing a program for executing an effect, an effect table, an ART lottery table, and the like. The sub ROM 414 is mainly composed of a program storage area and a table storage area.

(Sub RAM 415)
The sub RAM 415 functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 412 performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, there are provided a storage area for storing various data such as a winning area transmitted from the main control board 300, and a storage area for storing the determined contents and effects data. Further, the sub RAM 415 is provided with an ART state storage area for storing the ART state and an ART game number storage area for storing the number of ART games.

(Image control board 420)
The image control board 420 is provided for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 mainly when performing an effect. Further, an image control unit (VDP) 421, a liquid crystal control CPU 422a, a liquid crystal control ROM 422b, a liquid crystal control RAM 422c, a frame counter 422d, a CGROM 423, a crystal oscillator 424, a VRAM 425, and an RTC device 426 are connected to the image control board 420.

(Image Control Unit (VDP) 421)
An image control unit (VDP (Video Display Processor)) 421 is a so-called image processor and, based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 422a, “display for display” among the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area. The image data is read out from the “frame buffer area”. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated and output to the general-purpose board 38, thereby performing control of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 41. The image control unit (VDP) 421 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus I / F, a CPU I / F, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like. Connected by bus.

(LCD control CPU 422a)
The liquid crystal control CPU 422 a is provided for creating a display list based on the command received from the effect control board 410 and transmitting the display list to the image control unit (VDP) 421. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 422 a performs control to display the image data stored in the CGROM 423 on the liquid crystal display device 41.

(Liquid crystal control ROM 422b)
The liquid crystal control ROM 422b is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 422a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored. The animation pattern referred to here is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores a combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 422c)
The liquid crystal control RAM 422c is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 422a. The liquid crystal control RAM 422c also functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 422a performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 422b. The information stored in the liquid crystal control RAM 422c includes “effect time information” used for executing a specific effect performed by measuring a predetermined time.

(Frame counter 422d)
The frame counter 422d is provided to receive the power supply from the power supply board 500 and count the frame counter value. The frame counter 422d stops counting the frame counter value when the supply of power from the power supply board 500 is stopped. Then, when the supply of power by the power supply substrate 500 is resumed, the frame counter 422d initializes the frame counter value registered in the register and resumes counting.

(CGROM423)
A CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 423 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), an EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, etc.). Further, the CGROM 423 compresses and stores image data (for example, sprites, movies) and the like composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). This pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 423 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit (VDP) 421, and image processing is performed in units of image data of frames. Further, the CGROM 423 stores palette data in which color number information for designating color numbers and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.

  In this embodiment, the CGROM 423 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Not limited to this, a configuration in which only a part is compressed may be used. As a movie compression method, various compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

(Crystal oscillator 424)
The crystal oscillator 424 is provided to output a pulse signal (V blank interrupt signal) to the image control unit (VDP) 421 every “1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms)”. The image control unit (VDP) 421 generates a system clock for performing control by dividing the pulse signal, a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Then, the image control unit (VDP) 421 that has detected the V blank interrupt signal outputs an effect processing timing notification signal based on the V blank interrupt signal to the liquid crystal control CPU 422a at a predetermined timing.

(VRAM425)
The VRAM 425 is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). Here, the SRAM is a readable / writable memory and is a kind of volatile memory for temporarily holding data. By configuring the VRAM 425 with SRAM, writing and reading of image data can be processed at high speed. The VRAM 425 includes a memory map including an arbitrary area, a display list area 1, a display list area 2, a frame buffer area 1, and a frame buffer area 2.

(RTC device 426)
The RTC device 426 is provided for counting a predetermined counter value at a counting interval different from the count value counted by the frame counter 422d. The RTC device 426 is connected to the liquid crystal control CPU 422a of the image control board 420 via a bus. The RTC device 426 is provided for acquiring the current date and time.

(General-purpose board 38)
The general-purpose board 38 is provided between the image control board 420 and the liquid crystal display device 41, and has a bridge function that converts the image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it when displaying the image data. The general-purpose board 38 has a bridge function for converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the liquid crystal display device 41 for displaying image data. For example, a difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device 41 of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device 41 of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) is connected, etc. To absorb.

(Sound control board 430)
The sound control board 430 is a board for controlling the sound output of the speakers 34 and 35 mainly when performing an effect. The sound control board 430 is connected to a sound source IC 431, a sound source ROM 432, an audio RAM 433, and an amplifier 434.

(Sound source IC431)
The sound source IC 431 is provided for reading a program and data related to sound from the sound source ROM 432 and generating sound signals for driving the speakers 34 and 35.

(Sound source ROM 432)
The sound source ROM 432 is provided for storing programs and data for performing effects. Specifically, programs and data related to voice are stored.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the music source ROM 432 stores music data that is output via the speakers 34 and 35 when performing a later-described spinning effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, the sound source ROM 432 stores music data that is output when the main CPU 301 executes the spinning effect 03.

(Audio RAM 433)
The audio RAM 433 is provided for generating a sound such as BGM based on sound data corresponding to the effect.

(Amplifier 434)
The amplifier 434 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 431 and output it to the speakers 34 and 35.

(Internal structure of stepping motor)
Next, the internal structure of the stepping motor will be described with reference to FIG.

  Inside each of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, the A phase to D phase, which are the respective excitation phases, are arranged in order in a clockwise direction at intervals of approximately 90 °. A rotor is provided at the center of the A phase to the D phase. The main control board 300 performs control to output a pulse signal to the reel control board 100 based on a pulse data table (see FIG. 32) described later stored in the main ROM 302. The reel control board 100 Based on the pulse signal from the main control board 300, an excitation signal is output for each of the excitation phases A to D, so that the rotor rotates in a predetermined direction, and the reel 17 has the same direction as the rotor. Will rotate.

(Design arrangement table)
Next, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol arrangement table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the main CPU 301 detects the reel index, the symbol position in the middle of the display window 21 is defined as “00”. Further, “00” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are assigned to the symbols in the order of the reel rotation direction with reference to the symbol position “00”.

(Design code table)
Next, the symbol code table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol code table stores symbol codes corresponding to symbols arranged on the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c, and data corresponding to the symbols. Here, in the present embodiment, when the symbol code is “01”, “00000001” is stored as data corresponding to the symbol “red 7” as data. Similarly, data corresponding to each symbol is stored for symbol codes “02” to “10”.

  Further, the type of the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified based on the symbol counter value (“00” to “20”), the symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 6), and the symbol code table. Can do. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it may be specified that the symbol “watermelon” at the symbol position “00” is displayed in the middle of the display window 21. it can. Similarly, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it is specified that the symbol “Replay 1” at the symbol position “01” is displayed in the upper part of the display window 21. It is possible to specify that the symbol “Bell 1” at the symbol position “20” is displayed in the lower part of the display window 21. When the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified, the main CPU 301 stores “00000101” as data in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The data stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303 can be set as appropriate according to the effective line. For example, as in the present embodiment, when the effective line is a lower right line, “Replay 1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a, and therefore “00000101” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303. It may be memorized. In this case, data relating to symbols displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17 b and the lower stage of the right reel is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, FIG. 8 is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, and FIG. 10 is a symbol combination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “05”. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “06”, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “07”.

  The symbol combination table defines a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination, and a payout number. In the symbol combination table, symbol names corresponding to symbol groups and symbol bits are defined. In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a replay, and bonuses. A privilege such as the operation of the game is given to the player. If the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line does not match the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”. For example, when the symbol combination “Bell 1”, “Replay 1”, and “BAR1” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay 01”. It is determined that

  Here, the “payout number” represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. When a numerical value of “1” or more is determined as the number of payouts, medals are paid out. Specifically, medals are paid out when a combination of symbols in which a numerical value of “1” or more is defined as the payout number is displayed on the active line. The symbol combination tables in FIGS. 8 to 14 are stored in the main ROM 302.

  In this embodiment, “upper bell 01-12”, “technical intervention role 01-04”, “push order bell A1-A4”, “push order bell B1-01-02”, “push order bell B2-01” ˜02 ”,“ push order bell B3-01-02 ”,“ push order bell B4-01-02 ”,“ push order bell C1-C8 ”,“ correct answer bell 01-12 ”,“ middle stage watermelon 01-02 ” , "Upper watermelon 01-02", "Upward right watermelon 01-03", "Downward watermelon", "Cherry 01-01-06", "Cherry 02-01-15", "Special role 01-03" Based on the display of the symbol combination on the active line, the medal is paid out.

  Here, in the following, “upper bell 01-12”, “technical intervention role 01-04”, “push order bell A1-A4”, “push order bell B1-01-02”, “push order bell B2-01” ˜02 ”,“ push order bell B3-01-02 ”,“ push order bell B4-01-02 ”,“ push order bell C1-C8 ”,“ correct answer bell 01-12 ”,“ middle stage watermelon 01-02 ” , "Upper watermelon 01-02", "Upward right watermelon 01-03", "Downward watermelon", "Cherry 01-01-06", "Cherry 02-01-15", "Special role 01-03" Such symbol combinations may be collectively referred to as “a symbol combination related to winning”.

  In the following description, “upper bells 01 to 12” may be collectively referred to simply as “upper bell”. In the following, “technical intervention roles 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “technical intervention roles”. In the following, “push order bells A1 to A4”, “push order bells B1-01 to 02”, “push order bells B2-01 to 02”, “push order bells B3-01 to 02”, “push order” "Bell B4-01-02" and "push order bells C1-C8" may be collectively referred to simply as "push order bell". In the following, “correct answer bells 01 to 12” may be collectively referred to as “correct answer bell” in some cases. Further, in the following, “upper bell 01-12”, “push order bell A1-A4”, “push order bell B1-01-02”, “push order bell B2-01-02”, “push order bell B3- "01-02", "push order bell B4-01-02", "push order bell C1-C8" and "correct answer bell 01-12" may be collectively referred to simply as "bell". In the following, “middle stage watermelon 01-02”, “upper stage watermelon 01-02”, “rightward rising watermelon 01-03” and “rightward falling watermelon” may be collectively referred to simply as “watermelon”. . In the following, “cherry 01-01 to 06” and “cherry 02-01 to 15” may be collectively referred to as “cherry” in some cases. In the following, “special roles 01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “special roles”.

  In this embodiment, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, “downward right replay 01 to 04”, “ "Preparation Replay 01-04", "RT4 Transition Replay 01-08", "Follow Replay 01-04", "Red 7 Replay 01-01-04", "Red 7 Replay 02-01-04", "Red 7 Replay 03-01 to 08 "," Red 7 Replay 04-01 to 08 "," Blue 7 Replay 01 to 06 "," BAR Replay 01 "," BAR Replay 02 "," BAR Replay 03-01 to 03 "," "RUSH replay 01-01-04", "RUSH replay 02-01-04", "RUSH replay 03-01-06", "RUSH replay 04-01-02" When a combination of symbols relating to the "RUSH replay 05-01～04" is displayed on the pay line is the replay operation is performed.

  Here, in the following, “middle replay 01-04”, “upper replay 01-18”, “lower replay 01-18”, “upward right replay 01-09”, “lower right replay 01-04”, “preparation” “Replay 01-04”, “RT4 Transition Replay 01-08”, “Follow Replay 01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 01-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 02-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 03” -01 to 08 "," Red 7 Replay 04-01 to 08 "," Blue 7 Replay 01 to 06 "," BAR Replay 01 "," BAR Replay 02 "," BAR Replay 03-01 to 03 "," RUSH “Replay 01-01-04”, “RUSH Replay 02-01-04”, “RUSH Replay 03-01-06”, “RUSH Replay 04-01-02”, “ USH replay 05-01～04 "are collectively referred to, there is a case to be described as the" replay "or" replay ".

  In the following, “middle stage replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “middle stage replays”. Hereinafter, “upper replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “upper replays”. Hereinafter, “lower replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “lower replays”. In the following, “right-up replays 01 to 09” may be collectively referred to simply as “right-up replays”. In the following, “downwardly replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “downwardly replays”. In the following, “preparation replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “preparation replays”. In the following, “RT4 transition replay 01 to 08” may be collectively referred to as “RT4 transition replay” in some cases. In the following, “follow replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to as “follow replay” in some cases. In the following, “Red 7 Replay 01-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 02-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 03-01-08” and “Red 7 Replay 04-01-08” are collectively referred to. Then, it may be simply described as “Red 7 Replay”. In the following, “blue 7 replay 01 to 06” may be collectively referred to simply as “blue 7 replay”. In the following, “BAR replay 01”, “BAR replay 02”, and “BAR replay 03-01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “BAR replay”. In the following, "RUSH replay 01-01-04", "RUSH replay 02-01-04", "RUSH replay 03-01-06", "RUSH replay 04-01-02" and "RUSH replay 05-" "01-04" may be collectively referred to simply as "RUSH replay". Further, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, and “downward right replay 01 to 04” are collectively referred to as “normal”. "Replay" may be described.

  FIG. 8 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “01”, and “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, and “lower replay 01 to 18”, which are predetermined symbol combinations. ”,“ Right Ascending Replay 01-09 ”,“ Right Down Replay 01-04 ”,“ Preparation Replay 01-04 ”,“ RT4 Transition Replay 01-08 ”, bits corresponding to this symbol combination, and each bit The symbol bit name corresponding to is defined.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “01” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “middle stage replays 01 to 04” is defined.

  FIG. 9 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “02”, and “Follow Replay 01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 01-01-04”, “Red 7”, which are predetermined symbol combinations. "Replay 02-01-04", "Red 7 Replay 03-01-08", "Red 7 Replay 04-01-08", "Blue 7 Replay 01-06", "BAR Replay 01" and "BAR Replay 02" And a bit corresponding to the combination of symbols and a symbol bit name corresponding to each bit.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “02” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “follow replay 01 to 04” is defined.

  FIG. 10 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “03”, and “BAR replay 03-01 to 03”, “RUSH replay 01-01 to 08”, and “RUSH” are combinations of symbols that are determined in advance. "Replay 02-01-04", "RUSH Replay 03-01-06", "RUSH Replay 04-01-02", "RUSH Replay 05-01-04", "Upper Bell 01-12" and "Technical Interventor “01-04”, bits corresponding to this symbol combination, and symbol bit names corresponding to each bit.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “03” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “BAR replay 03-01 to 03” is defined.

  FIG. 11 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “04”, and “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “ “Push Order Bell A4”, “Push Order Bell B1-01-02”, “Push Order Bell B2-01-02”, “Push Order Bell B3-01-02” and “Push Order Bell B4-01-02” The bit corresponding to this symbol combination and the symbol bit name corresponding to each bit are defined.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “04” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “push order bell A1” is defined.

  FIG. 12 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “05”, and “push order bell C1”, “push order bell C2”, “push order bell C3”, “ "Push order bell C4", "Push order bell C5", "Push order bell C6", "Push order bell C7" and "Push order bell C8", the bit corresponding to this symbol combination, and each bit Designated for design bit names.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “05” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “push order bell C1” is defined.

  FIG. 13 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “06”, and “correct answer bells 01 to 12”, “middle watermelons 01 to 02”, and “upper watermelons 01 to 02” are predetermined symbol combinations. ”,“ Right-up watermelon 01-03 ”,“ Right-down watermelon ”,“ Cherry 01-01-06 ”,“ Cherry 02-01-15 ”and“ Special role 01 ”, and bits corresponding to this symbol combination The symbol bit names corresponding to each bit are defined.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “06” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), the symbol combinations related to “correct bells 01 to 12” are defined.

  FIG. 14 is a symbol combination table in which the symbol combination group is “07”, and “special role 02”, “special role 03”, “blanks 01-01 to 08”, “ "Blank 02-01-02", "Blank 03-01-08", "Blank 04-01-08", "Blank 05-01-12" and "Blank 06-01-08" The corresponding bits and symbol bit names corresponding to each bit are defined.

  For example, when the symbol combination group is “07” and bit 0 is ON (00000001), a symbol combination related to “special role 02” is defined.

  In the following, “blank 01-01 to 08”, “blank 02-01-02”, “blank 03-01 to 08”, “blank 04-01 to 08”, “blank 05-01 to 12” and “Blank 06-01 to 08” may be collectively referred to simply as “blank”.

(Game state transition table)
Next, the gaming state transition table will be described based on FIG.

  The gaming state transition table is stored in the main ROM 302 and defines the current gaming state, conditions for transitioning the RT gaming state, and the gaming state of the transition destination. Here, in the present embodiment, when the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays that one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Based on the above, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301, based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, Control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “Blue 7 Replay” or “Follow Replay” on the active line. Based on this, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 selects one of the combinations of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay”, “Blue 7 Replay”, or “Follow Replay” on the active line. Based on the display of the combination of symbols, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  Also, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT5 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” on the active line in the RT2 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT3 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line in the RT3 gaming state. Control to shift to the RT4 gaming state is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT5 based on the fact that any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line in the RT3 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT4 gaming state to the RT5 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” on the active line in the RT4 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT5 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT5 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Also, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT5 gaming state to the RT2 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” on the active line in the RT5 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  Here, the winning area that can be determined in the internal lottery process to be described later differs depending on which of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, or the RT5 gaming state. . Specifically, for example, “blue 7 replay” can be determined as the winning area in the RT1 gaming state, but “blue 7 replay” is not determined as the winning area in the RT0 gaming state. .

  In the internal lottery process described later, the winning probability depends on the gaming state depending on whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, or the RT5 gaming state. There are different winning areas. Although specifically described later, for example, the probability that “preparation replay” is determined as the winning area is defined to be higher in the RT5 gaming state than in the RT1 gaming state.

  In addition, even in the same gaming state, winning areas having different winning probabilities depending on currently set values are provided. Specifically, for example, in the RT0 gaming state, the probability that “common bell” is determined as the winning area is defined to be higher in “setting 6” than in “setting 1”.

  Hereinafter, the RT0 gaming state may be described as “non-RT gaming state” or “general gaming state”, and the RT1 gaming state to RT5 gaming state may be collectively referred to as “RT gaming state”. .

(Winning area table)
Next, the winning area table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the winning area table, stored in the main ROM 302, the winning areas of “00” to “36”, the contents corresponding to each winning area, the operation of the condition device corresponding to each winning area, and each gaming state It is specified whether or not to be determined.

  For example, the winning area “00” may be determined in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, while the winning area “00” is not determined in the RT2 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state. The winning area “01” may be determined in the RT2 gaming state, but is not likely to be determined in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state.

  In addition, the winning area table defines combinations of symbols arranged on the active line according to the order in which the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the stop operation by the player when each winning area is won.

  In the winning area table, the winning areas in which the combinations of symbols arranged on the active line differ according to the order in which the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the stop operation by the player, and the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are the player. The winning area is defined in which the combination of symbols on the active line does not differ depending on the order in which the stop operation is detected.

  Here, as an example of a winning area in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line is different depending on the order in which the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the stop operation by the player, in the internal lottery process described later, the winning area “03” Is determined, that is, when “bonus rush replay 03” is determined as the winning area, when the left stop switch 11sw first detects a stop operation, the symbol related to “blue 7 replay” or “follow replay” is displayed. When the combination stops on the active line and the middle stop switch 12sw first detects a stop operation, the symbol combination related to “normal replay” stops on the active line, and the right stop switch 13sw first detects the stop operation. Then, the symbol combination related to “RT4 transition replay” stops on the active line.

  On the other hand, as an example of a winning area in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line is not different depending on the order in which the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the stop operation by the player, in the internal lottery process described later, the winning area “00” Is determined, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the stop operation, the combination of symbols related to replay is aligned on the effective line, or the combination of symbols related to winning is the effective line. It ’s never aligned.

  Further, in the internal lottery process described later, even when a predetermined winning area is determined, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not operated at an appropriate timing, A predetermined combination of symbols may not be displayed on the active line.

  For example, in the internal lottery process described later, when “30” is determined as the winning area, that is, when “weak watermelon” is determined as the winning area, the middle stage of the display window 21 when the middle stop button 12 is operated. "Watermelon", "Red 7" and "Blue 7", which are part of the combination of symbols allowed to win when the symbol displayed in symbol position "00" is placed within the 4-frame range Therefore, the symbols related to “watermelon”, “red 7”, and “blue 7” cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, even if “30” is determined as the winning area, if the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 is not performed at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to the determined winning area is set to the effective line. Can't be displayed on top. For this reason, in such a situation, it is required to operate the left stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing.

  On the other hand, in a case where a specific winning area is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13, the symbol related to the specific winning area on the active line Are displayed on the active line.

  For example, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when “29” is determined as the winning area, that is, when “common bell” is determined as the winning area, the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13, and the operation timing Regardless, the symbol combination related to “bell” is displayed on the active line.

(Winning area determination table)
Next, the winning area determination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT0, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT1, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT2. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT3, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT4, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT5. .

  The winning area determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for each gaming state. Here, in the present embodiment, a winning area determination table for RT0, a winning area determination table for RT1, a winning area determination table for RT2, a winning area determination table for RT3, a winning area determination table for RT4, and a winning area determination table for RT5. Is provided.

  In the winning area determination table, lottery values are defined for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, a winning area determination table for RT0, a winning area determination table for RT1, a winning area determination table for RT2, a winning area determination table for RT3, a winning area determination table for RT4, and a winning area determination table for RT5. The lottery values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are respectively defined.

(RT0 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 17, the winning area determination table for RT0 is the winning area “losing”, “normal replay”, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell”. “A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “technical intervention role”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon” ”,“ Weak cherry ”,“ strong cherry ”,“ weak chance ”,“ medium chance ”, and“ strong chance ”are specified. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”. In the RT0 gaming state, “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 BAR all-match replay 01”, “BAR replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR replay 03 during RT4”, “Blue 7 replay”, “preparation replay 01” “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”, “RT3 “Middle Single BAR Replay 01”, “RT3 Single BAR Replay 02”, “RT3 Single BAR Replay 03”, “RT3 Double BAR Replay 01”, “RT3 Double BAR Replay 02”, “RT3 Double BAR Replay 03” ”And“ Replay for state transition ”are not determined as winning areas. .

  In the RT0 winning area determination table, a lottery value is defined for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, lottery values are defined for “setting 1” to “setting 6” respectively, but in FIG. 16, illustration of lottery values for “setting 2” to “setting 5” is omitted. doing.

  Here, when the lottery values defined in the RT0 winning area determination table in the case of “setting 1” and “setting 6” are compared, “setting 6” is winning when compared with “setting 1”. The probability that “00” is determined as an area is defined low. In other words, “Setting 6” has a lower probability of “losing” than “Setting 1”, and has a higher probability of determining any winning area other than “losing”. Therefore, it can be said that “setting 6” is a setting value that is more advantageous to the player than “setting 1”.

  For “Setting 2” to “Setting 5”, the higher the set value, the lower the probability that “00” is determined as the winning area. That is, the higher the setting value, the more advantageous the setting value for the player.

(RT1 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 18, the winning area determination table for RT1 is the winning area “losing”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “preparation replay 01”, “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”. , “Push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “Push order bell B4”, “technical intervention role”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance eye”, “medium chance eye” and A lottery value is defined for “Strong Chance”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT1 gaming state, “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 BAR all-match replay 01”, "RT4 BAR Replay 02", "RT4 BAR Replay 03", "Normal Replay", "RT3 Single BAR Replay 01", "RT3 Single BAR Replay 02", "RT3 Single BAR Replay 03", “Double BAR replay 01 during RT3”, “Double BAR replay 02 during RT3”, “Double BAR replay 03 during RT3” and “Replay for state transition” are not determined as winning areas.

  Similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table defines lottery values for each set value. In FIG. 18, the lottery values of “setting 2” to “setting 5” are determined. The illustration is omitted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state have a probability that “losing” is determined as the winning area compared to the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state. Since it is high, it can be said that it is a relatively unfavorable gaming state for the player.

(RT2 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 19, the winning area determination table for RT2 is the winning area “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”. , “Push order bell A3”, “push order bell B4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “technical intervention role”, “ Lottery values are defined for “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance”, and “strong chance”. In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT2 gaming state, “lost”, “BAR-matched replay 01 during RT4”, “BAR-matched replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR-matched replay 03 during RT4” , “Blue 7 complete replay”, “Preparation replay 01”, “Preparation replay 02”, “Preparation replay 03”, “Preparation replay 04”, “Normal replay”, “RT3 single BAR replay 01”, “RT3 single “BAR Replay 02”, “Single BAR Replay 03 during RT3”, “Double BAR Replay 01 During RT3”, “Double BAR Replay 02 During RT3”, “Double BAR Replay 03 During RT3”, and “State Transition Replay” are the winning areas. Is never determined.

  Similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table and the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value. In FIG. 19, “setting 2” to “setting” The drawing of the lottery value “5” is omitted.

(RT3 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 20, the winning area determination table for RT3 includes the winning areas “normal replay”, “single BAR replay 01 during RT3”, “single BAR replay 02 during RT3”, “single BAR replay 03 during RT3”, “RT3 “Middle Double BAR Replay 01”, “RT3 Middle BAR Replay 02”, “RT3 Middle BAR Replay 03”, “State Transition Replay”, “Push Order A1”, “Push Order A2”, “Push Order Bell” “A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “technical intervention”, “common bell”, “ Lottery values are defined for “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance” and “strong chance” In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT3 gaming state, “losing”, “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, and “BAR during RT4” are aligned. “Replay 01”, “BAR replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR replay 03 during RT4”, “Blue 7 replay”, “Preparation replay 01”, “Preparation replay 02”, “Preparation replay 03”, “Preparation replay” “04” is not determined as the winning area.

  Similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, and the RT2 winning area determination table, the RT3 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value. Illustration of lottery values of “setting 2” to “setting 5” is omitted.

(RT4 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 21, the winning area determination table for RT4 includes the winning areas “BAR replay 01 during RT4”, “BAR replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR replay 03 during RT4”, “push order bell A1”, “Push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “ Lottery values for “Technical Intervention”, “Common Bell”, “Weak Watermelon”, “Strong Watermelon”, “Weak Cherry”, “Strong Cherry”, “Weak Chance”, “Medium Chance” and “Strong Chance” Is stipulated. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT4 gaming state, “losing”, “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, “blue 7 all-match replay” ”,“ Preparation replay 01 ”,“ preparation replay 02 ”,“ preparation replay 03 ”,“ preparation replay 04 ”,“ normal replay ”,“ single BAR replay 01 during RT3 ”,“ single BAR replay 02 during RT3 ”,“ “RT3 single BAR replay 03”, “RT3 double BAR replay 01”, “RT3 double BAR replay 02”, “RT3 double BAR replay 03”, and “state transition replay” are determined as winning areas. No.

  In addition, the RT4 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value, similar to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, and the RT3 winning area determination table. In FIG. 21, the drawing of the lottery values “setting 2” to “setting 5” is omitted.

(RT5 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 22, the winning area determination table for RT5 is the winning area “preparation replay 01”, “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”, “normal replay”, “push order bell A1. ”,“ Push order bell A2 ”,“ push order bell A3 ”,“ push order bell A4 ”,“ push order bell B1 ”,“ push order bell B2 ”,“ push order bell B3 ”,“ push order bell B4 ” , "Technical intervention role", "common bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak chance", "medium chance" and "strong chance" A lottery value is defined. In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT4 gaming state, “losing”, “bonus rush replay 01”, “bonus rush replay 02”, “bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 during BAR alignment” “Replay 01”, “BAR Aligned Replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR Aligned Replay 03 During RT4”, “Blue 7 Aligned Replay”, “Single BAR Replay 01 During RT3”, “Single BAR Replay 02 During RT3”, “RT3 During “Single BAR Replay 03”, “Double BAR Replay 01 during RT3”, “Double BAR Replay 02 during RT3”, “Double BAR Replay 03 during RT3”, and “Replay for State Transition” are not determined as winning areas.

  The RT5 winning area determination table is a set value similar to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, the RT3 winning area determination table, and the RT4 winning area determination table. A lottery value is defined for each, and in FIG. 21, illustration of lottery values of “setting 2” to “setting 5” is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, since the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are less likely to be determined as a winning area than the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, This is a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player.

  Hereinafter, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state may be collectively referred to as “replay time (RT)”.

(Cylinder production table)
Next, based on FIG. 23, the spinning drum production table will be described.

  The rotation effect table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is defined for the winning area and the rotating effect 01 to the rotating effect 04 corresponding to the winning area. Each of the spinning effects of the spinning effect 01 to the rotating effect 04 is defined as to whether or not to execute the spinning effect for each winning area. For example, when the winning area is “07”, “rotation effect 01” can be executed.

  Here, the “rotating effect” means that the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotated in the reverse direction, the rotational speed is accelerated or decelerated, and a special symbol combination (for example, the display window 21). As an aspect of the combination of symbols displayed on the screen, it means an effect performed by stopping at a combination of symbols in which the symbols related to “BAR2” are displayed in a straight line). Even if the operation of the 1BET button 7, the operation of the MAX-BET button 8, the operation of the start lever 10 for starting the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c is performed, the operation is performed for a predetermined time. A process that does not perform the process based on the process (for example, the process of starting rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c) is also included in the spinning effect.

  However, the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 necessary for the spinning effect, not the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 for using the medals necessary for the game, the game The operation of the start lever, which is necessary for the spinning effect, is not invalidated, not the operation of the start lever 10 for rotating the reel 17 at the start. For example, when the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10, the reel rotation is reversed, the rotation speed is increased or decreased, and a special symbol combination (for example, displayed on the display window 21). As a combination mode of the symbols to be displayed, it is possible to temporarily stop the symbol according to “BAR2” by a combination of symbols displayed in a straight line).

(Cylinder effect 01)
“Rotation effect 01” is a rotation effect that can be performed when the winning area is “07”. In other words, this is a spinning effect that can be performed when “blue 7 uniform replay” is determined as the winning area. Here, as described above, “blue 7 uniform replay” is a winning area that can be determined only in the RT1 gaming state. Therefore, it can be said that the turning effect 1 is a turning effect that can be executed in the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning area “07” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the main CPU 301 determines the “rotation effect 01 based on the rotor effect 01 lottery effect lottery table to be described later. To determine whether or not to execute. Then, when it is decided to execute the “rotation effect 01”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 for using the medals necessary for the game, the operation of the MAX-BET button 8, Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start rotation of the reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, processing based on the operation is not performed.

  In addition, when the winning area “07” is determined, even if weight is given to the privilege to be given to the player depending on whether the “rotation effect 01” is executed or the “rotation effect 01” is not executed. Good. For example, when the “rotor effect 01” is executed by the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 gives more ART games or increases the number of ART games than when the “rotor effect 01” is not executed. It is possible to shift to a mode that is easy to add.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 01” is performed when the start lever 10 is operated, that is, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. It is not limited to. For example, when one of the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw or right stop switch 13sw detects the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player, the "rotation effect 01" is performed. Alternatively, after any of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detects the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are further stopped by the player. , 13 may be performed when the operation is detected, or when all stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player, You may perform "rotation effect 01".

(Cylinder effect 02)
“Rotating drum effect 02” is a rotating drum effect that can be performed when the winning area is “20” to “36”. That is, as the winning areas, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” "Bell B3", "Push Order B4", "Technical Intervention", "Common Bell", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", "Weak Cherry", "Strong Cherry", "Weak Chance", "Medium This is a spinning effect that can be performed when “chance eyes” or “strong chance eyes” are determined.

  Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 determines “01” to “03” as the winning areas, and sets the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw to the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in a predetermined order. Based on the detection of the operation, a process of setting “48” to the value of the spinning drum effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter for each game. Then, when the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter is “1” or more and the winning area is “20” to “36”, based on the rotation effect 02 lottery effect lottery table described later, Based on the fact that the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 when the lottery effect 02 is performed and the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter becomes “0”, the reel After swinging 17 in the forward and reverse directions for a certain period of time, a spinning effect such as rotating the reel 17 in the reverse direction is performed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 301 does not win the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the “rotation effect 02”, the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter becomes “0”. Based on the fact that the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10, the reel 17 is swung in the forward direction and the reverse direction for a certain period of time, and then a spinning effect is produced in which the reel 17 is rotated in the forward direction.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation effect 02 is a rotation effect for the time when the state does not shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state (hereinafter referred to as “rotation effect 02-01”), an ART game. A spinning effect for shifting to the number determination state or the ART game number addition state (hereinafter referred to as “rotation effect 02-02”), when not shifting to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state, and halfway After executing the same spinning effect, there is provided a spinning effect (hereinafter referred to as “rotating effect 02-03”) for performing the same spinning effect as when shifting to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 02” is performed when the start switch 10sw detects an operation of the start lever 10 by the player, but is not limited thereto. For example, the “rotation effect 02” may be performed when other switches such as the 1BET switch 7sw, the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw, and the settlement switch 9sw detect an operation by the player.

(Cylinder effect 03)
“Rotating effect 03” is a rotating effect that can be performed when the winning area is “04” to “06”. In other words, this is a spinning effect that can be performed when “the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4”, “the BAR matching replay 02 during RT4” or “the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4” is determined as the winning area.

  Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines, in the internal lottery process described later, that “RT4 BAR-matched replay 01”, “RT4 BAR-matched replay 02” or “RT4 BAR-matched replay 03” is determined as the winning area. In addition, a lottery is performed based on a reeling effect lottery table for the rotating effect 03 described later. Then, the main CPU 301 wins the lottery, and when the symbol related to “BAR2” is aligned with the middle line and the right-up line, or the symbol related to “BAR2” is aligned with the middle-line and the right-down line. On the basis of the above, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 in the next game, the control for executing the “rotation effect 03” is performed.

  Here, “RT4 BAR uniform replay 01”, “RT4 BAR uniform replay 02” and “RT4 BAR uniform replay 03” are winning areas that can be determined in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the “rotation effect 03” is a rotation effect that can be executed when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, when executing the “rotation effect 03”, the main CPU 301 operates the 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 to use medals necessary for the game for “about 29600 ms”. Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, processing based on the operations is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 03” is performed when the start switch 10sw detects an operation of the start lever 10 by the player, but is not limited thereto. For example, the “rotation effect 03” may be performed when other switches such as the 1BET switch 7sw, the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw, and the settlement switch 9sw detect an operation by the player.

(Cylinder effect 04)
“Rotating drum effect 04” is a rotating drum effect performed when the winning area is “29” to “36”. In other words, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance” or “strong chance” are determined as the winning areas. This is a revolving effect that can be performed.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery process described later in the RT5 gaming state, the main CPU 301 selects “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak” as winning areas. When “chance eyes”, “medium chance eyes”, or “strong chance eyes” are determined, a lottery is performed based on a spinning effect lottery table for the rotating effect 04 described later. And main CPU301 performs control which performs "rotation effect 04" based on having won the said lottery.

  In addition, the “rotation effect 04” is provided with effect times S1 to S4 for performing the rotation effect 04. When the production time S1 is determined, during the “about 2384 ms”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 and the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 for using the medals necessary for the game, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start the rotation of the right reel 17c, the processing based on the operation is not performed.

  Similarly, when the production time S2 is determined, the production time S3 is determined to be “about 4768 ms”. When the production time S3 is determined, the production time S4 is determined to be “about 9499 ms”. After performing the operation, the operation of the 1BET button 7 and the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 to use the medals necessary for the game, and the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c for “about 4381 ms”. Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start the operation, processing based on the operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 04” is performed when all the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13, but the present invention is not limited to this. Never happen. For example, when the start switch 10sw detects an operation by the player, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed, and any one of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw is a game among the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw. When the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player is detected, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed, or any one of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw is stopped by the player. After detecting the above operation, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed when the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player.

  It should be noted that in the “rotation effect 01” to “rotation effect 04”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 for using a medal and the operation of the start lever 10 for starting the rotation of the reel 17 Even when the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is detected, the time during which processing based on the operation is not performed can be set as appropriate.

(Cylinder production lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 24, a spinning effect lottery table will be described.

  The spinning effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302. In addition, the spinning effect lottery table defines a winning area and a lottery value for each winning area.

  In addition, the rotation effect lottery table is provided with a rotation effect lottery table corresponding to each of the rotation effect 01 to 04. Specifically, (a) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 01, (b) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 02, (c) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 03, (d). A rotation effect drawing lottery table for the rotation effect 04 is stored in the main ROM 302.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 01)
As shown in FIG. 24A, the lottery value for the spinning effect 01 for the spinning effect 01 defines the lottery value for the winning area “07”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when the winning area “07” is determined, it is determined that the spinning effect 01 is executed at “63/253”, and the spinning is performed at “190/253”. It is determined not to execute the effect 01.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Cylinder effect 02)
As shown in FIG. 24B, the lottery value in the case of the winning areas “20” to “36” is defined in the spinning effect lottery table for the rotating effect 02. Specifically, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when the winning areas “20” to “36” are determined, whether or not to execute the spinning effect 02 based on the lottery value corresponding to each winning area. Is determined.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 03)
As shown in FIG. 24C, the lottery value for the spinning effect 03 for the spinning effect 03 defines the lottery values for the winning areas “04” to “06”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are determined, it is determined to execute the spinning effect 03 at “120/253”, and “133/253”. ”Is determined not to execute the rotation effect 03.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 04)
As shown in FIG. 24 (d), the spinning effect lottery table for the spinning effect 04 defines the lottery values in the case of winning areas “29” to “36”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when the winning areas “29” to “36” are determined, whether or not to execute the spinning effect 02 based on the lottery value corresponding to each winning area. Is determined.

(Direction block table)
Next, the effect block table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, FIG. 25 is a figure which shows the effect block tables 1-3, and FIG. 26 is a figure which shows the effect block tables 4-9.

  The effect block tables 1 to 9 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the spinning effect, and effect block data is defined. The effect block data defines a correction target reel, a movable reel, a correction flag, an offset value of an effect phase table (to be described later) used when executing the spinning effect, and an effect block end flag. .

(Correction reel)
The data corresponding to the correction target reel defined in the effect block data is composed of 3-bit data. When bit 0 is ON, it indicates that the right reel 17c is the correction target reel, bit 1 When ON is shown, the middle reel 17b is a correction target reel. When bit 2 is ON, the left reel 17a is a correction target reel. Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for correcting the rotation direction of the reel based on the correction flag and the data corresponding to the correction target reel during the spinning effect.

(Movable reel)
The data corresponding to the movable reel specified in the production block data is composed of 3-bit data. When bit 0 is ON, it indicates that the right reel 17c is a movable reel, and bit 1 is ON. In this case, it indicates that the middle reel 17b is a movable reel, and when the bit 2 is ON, it indicates that the left reel 17a is a movable reel. Therefore, the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 based on data corresponding to the movable reel during the spinning effect.

(Correction flag)
The data corresponding to the correction flag defined in the effect block data is composed of 1-bit data. When the bit corresponding to the correction flag is ON, the main CPU 301 performs control to correct the rotation direction of the reel during the spinning effect based on the data corresponding to the correction target reel.

(Direction block end flag)
Data corresponding to the effect block end flag defined in the effect block data is a flag for ending execution of the effect block table. For example, when the production block table 1 is executed, No. Since the production block end flag is defined in the column 2, no. After the process related to the effect block data in the column 1 is completed, the process based on the effect block table 1 is ended.

(Direction phase table)
Next, the effect phase table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  27 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 1 to 10, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 11 to 20, and FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 21 to 31.

  The effect phase tables 1 to 31 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the spinning effect, and store effect phase data. Here, in the effect phase data, the number of executions, a correction flag, a type of a rotation effect execution table described later used when executing the rotation effect, and a phase end flag are defined.

(Number of executions)
The data corresponding to the number of executions defined in the effect phase data is the number of times the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are controlled based on a rotation effect execution table to be described later when the rotation effect is executed. is there. For example, when the production phase table 1 is used, the spinning production execution data in the spinning production execution table 15 is executed 1119 times.

(Correction flag)
The data corresponding to the correction flag defined in the effect phase data is composed of 1-bit data, and correction is performed when the bit corresponding to the correction flag is ON. Specifically, when the correction flag defined in the effect phase tables 1 to 31 is ON, the main CPU 301 changes the rotation direction of the reel according to the stop position of the reel 17 when performing the spinning effect. Control to correct.

(Phase end flag)
Data corresponding to the phase end flag defined in the effect phase data is a flag for ending execution of the effect phase table. For example, when the production phase table 1 is executed, no. Since the phase end flag is defined in the column 2, no. After the process related to the effect phase data in the column 1 is completed, the process based on the effect phase table 1 is ended.

(Cylinder production execution table)
Next, based on FIG. 30 to FIG. 31, the spinning effect execution table will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the spinning effect execution tables 1 to 9, and FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the spinning effect execution tables 10 to 19.

  The rotation effect execution tables 1 to 19 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the rotation effect, and store the rotation effect execution data. Here, the rotation effect, the four-phase OFF flag, the excitation holding count, and the rotation effect execution table end flag are defined in the rotation effect execution data.

(Direction of rotation)
The data corresponding to the rotation direction defined in the rotation effect execution data is data relating to the rotation direction of the reel 17 when executing the rotation effect. Specifically, the rotation direction of the reel is corrected by adding data corresponding to the rotation direction to the data of the current excitation pattern.

(4-phase OFF flag)
Data corresponding to the four-phase OFF flag defined in the spinning effect execution data is a flag for turning off all the excitation phases A to D of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. Specifically, when the value of the four-phase OFF flag is “1”, the main CPU 301 performs control to turn off all the excitation phases A to D of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. .

(Excitation holding frequency)
Data corresponding to the number of times of excitation holding defined in the spinning effect execution data is a value used to move the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, and holds each excitation phase of A phase to D phase. It is a value indicating time. For this reason, the larger the value of the number of times of excitation holding defined in the spinning drum performance execution tables 1 to 19 is, the longer the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the above-mentioned rotation direction for a longer time.

(Cylinder effect execution table end flag)
The rotation effect execution table end flag defined in the rotation effect execution table 1 to 31 is a flag for ending the execution of the rotation effect execution table. For example, when executing the rotation effect execution execution table 1, no. No. 2 has a rotation effect execution table end flag defined therein. After the processing related to the spinning effect execution data in the column 1 is completed, the processing based on the spinning effect execution table 1 is ended.

(Pulse data table)
Next, the pulse data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pulse data table is stored in the main ROM 302, and each of the excitation phases of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, that is, the A phase to the D phase, and the positions (a) to (h) (see FIG. 5). It is prescribed about data concerning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the reel control board 100 controls the driving of the reel 17 by 1-2 phase excitation with respect to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. The main ROM 302 stores a pulse data table (see FIG. 32A) in the case of 1-2 phase excitation.

  Specifically, the pulse data table stores eight pieces of pulse data from (a) position to (h) position, and these pulse data are AB phase, B phase, BC phase, C phase, respectively. This is data for requesting excitation for the phase, CD phase, C phase, AD phase, and A phase. The main control board 301 sequentially reads eight pulse data from the (a) position to the (h) position specified in the pulse data table, and outputs a pulse signal to each phase requested by the pulse data. When the output of the pulse signal based on the (h) position is completed, the reel returns to the (a) position, and the reel rotates forward by outputting the pulse signal based on the (a) position.

  Here, pulse signals are output in the order of (a) position, (b) position, (c) position, (d) position, (e) position, (f) position, (g) position, and (h) position. As a result, the reel 17 rotates in the forward direction, but the (h) position, (g) position, (f) position, (e) position, (d) position, (c) position, (b) position, (a ) By outputting pulse signals in the order of positions, the reel 17 rotates in the reverse direction. Here, the forward direction refers to the fact that the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front and the symbol visible by the display window 21 rotates from the upper direction to the lower direction, and the reverse direction is the visual recognition of the gaming machine 1 from the front. Then, the symbol that can be visually recognized by the display window 21 is rotated upward from the lower direction.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control board 100 controls the driving of the reel 17 by 1-2 phase excitation with respect to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, drive control of the reel 17 may be performed by two-phase excitation. In this case, the main ROM 302 stores a pulse data table (see FIG. 32B) in the case of two-phase excitation.

(State transition diagram managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states controlled by the sub-control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display any one of the normal background, the precursor background, and the special background on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420 in the normal state.

(Normal background)
As described above, the normal background is disadvantageous for the player. In this embodiment, the normal background is provided with the normal background A to the normal background C, and the sub CPU 412 performs image control on any one of the normal background A to the normal background C when displaying the normal background. Control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the substrate 420. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift the normal background A to the normal background C under a predetermined condition. Further, the sub CPU 412 may perform control to shift to the precursor background or the special background after the continuous performance A.

(Sign background)
The precursor background is provided with a precursor background A and a precursor background B, both of which suggest a transition to a precursor stage A (described later) and a self-releasing mode. Therefore, the sub CPU 412 displays the precursor background on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420, so that the player can expect to enter the precursor stage A and the self-releasing mode. Also, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift the precursor background A to the precursor background B under a predetermined condition.

(Special background)
The special background is a background that suggests that a lottery for shifting to the self-releasing mode described later is performed with high probability. For this reason, the sub CPU 412 displays a special background on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420, so that the player can be expected to win the lottery to enter the self-releasing mode. In addition, the sub CPU 412 passes the image control board 420 when the lottery for shifting to the self-releasing mode is performed with a low probability from the state where the lottery for shifting to the self-releasing mode described later is performed with a high probability. Thus, control for displaying the normal background on the liquid crystal display device 41 is performed.

(A precursor stage A)
The precursor stage A is a stage that suggests transition to a Bonus preparation state A described later. The precursor stage A can be shifted from the normal state by the sub CPU 412 after the end of the continuous performance A. In the present embodiment, in particular, from the normal state before the predetermined number of games from the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state A determined based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) described later. The rate of transition to the precursor stage A is defined high. Similarly, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the ratio of the transition from the normal state to the precursor stage A before a predetermined number of games out of the range of the number of games that is defined with a high lottery value Highly regulated. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus preparation state A.

(Continuous production A)
Continuous effect A is an effect performed over a plurality of games. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control to notify the transition to the self-releasing mode by displaying the result of the continuous effect A on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control for notifying the normal state and the transition to the precursor stage A by displaying the result of the continuous effect A on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420.

(Self-releasing mode)
The self-releasing mode is a mode in which the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state A based on the combination of symbols related to the push order bell being displayed on the active line. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the number of games staying in the self-releasing mode is determined by lottery until 10 games, 20 games, or the winning lottery transition to the Bonus preparation state A is won. decide. In addition, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus preparation state A when the lottery to shift to the Bonus preparation state A is won in the self-releasing mode. On the other hand, the sub CPU 412 does not win the lottery for the transition to the Bonus preparation state A, but shifts to the normal state by digesting the predetermined number of games out of the 10 games or 20 games determined by the above lottery. To control.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 displays the combination of symbols related to the push order bell on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the internal lottery process described later. Control which notifies the order of stop operation with stop operation order display lamps 30a-30c is performed. Thus, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in an appropriate order, thereby pressing the bell. Since it can display on the combination effective line of the symbol concerned, it can receive the transfer lottery to the Bonus preparation state A.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the transition to the Bonus preparation state A is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to the push order bell is displayed on the active line. However, the present invention is limited to this. There is no. For example, a transition lottery to the Bonus preparation state A may be performed based on the fact that another symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the push order bell is displayed on the active line, or an internal lottery described later In the processing, a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state A may be performed based on the determination of a predetermined winning area.

(Continuous production B)
Continuous effect B is an effect performed over a plurality of games. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control to notify the transition to the Bonus preparation state A by displaying the result of the continuous effect B on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to notify the transition to the normal state by displaying the result of the continuous effect B on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420.

(Bonus preparation state A)
The Bonus preparation state A is a state before the transition to the Bonus state, and includes three types of states: Bonus preparation A, Bonus preparation B, and Bonus notification. Here, in the Bonus preparation A, when the winning areas “08” to “11” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 displays a combination of symbols related to the preparation replay on the active line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus preparation B based on the combination of symbols related to the preparation replay being displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the Bonus preparation B, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 displays a combination of symbols related to the push order bell on the active line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to Bonus notification based on the determination of the winning areas “01” to “03” by the internal lottery process described later.

  Further, the sub CPU 412 performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c based on the lottery result using a Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) described later at the time of Bonus notification. The control which alert | reports the order of is performed. Thereby, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus state A to the Bonus state C based on the lottery result using the Bonus state distribution table.

  Here, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus state A on the basis that the BAR1 symbols are aligned on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right rising line, and the right falling line. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus state B based on the fact that the red 7 symbols are aligned on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right rising line, and the right falling line. On the other hand, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus state C based on the fact that the blue 7 symbols are aligned on any of the upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines.

  When a combination of symbols related to follow replay is displayed on any of the middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines, the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) described later is displayed. Based on the lottery result used, control is performed to shift to any of the Bonus state A to the Bonus state C.

(Bonus state)
In the Bonus state, a Bonus state A to a Bonus state C are provided. In the following, each Bonus state will be described.

(Bonus state A)
The Bonus state A is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the Bonus state A, the sub CPU 412 activates the combination of symbols related to the push order bells when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 20 games. Control for informing the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 appropriate for display on the line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c is performed. Then, when the navigation stock described later is acquired during 20 games, control is performed to shift to the ART game number determination state.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay can be displayed on the effective line after the 20 games are over, control for shifting to the ART game number determination state may be performed.

(Bonus state B)
The Bonus state B is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the Bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 activates the combination of symbols related to the push order bell when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 48 games. Control for informing the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 appropriate for display on the line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c is performed. Further, in the bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock lottery based on a winning area determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, and controls to shift to the ART game number determination state when the navigation stock is acquired. I do.

  In the bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 performs a meter rising lottery based on a winning area determined by an internal lottery process to be described later. At the end of 48 games, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of ART games based on the meter value. You may perform control which determines whether to transfer to.

(Bonus state C)
The Bonus state C is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the Bonus state C, the sub CPU 412 makes the combination of symbols related to the push order bell effective when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 48 games. Control for informing the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 appropriate for display on the line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c is performed. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game number determination state based on the completion of the Bonus state C.

  Here, after the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B ends, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the result screen A when the ART game number determination state is not entered.

  In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 412 controls the bonus state, the main CPU 301 controls the RT3 gaming state as long as the combination of symbols related to the blank is not displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the RT3 gaming state is a combination of symbols related to a red 7 symbol, a blue 7 symbol, or a BAR 1 symbol on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right rising line, or the right falling line. When is displayed, etc. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state is a type 1 special feature, a type 2 special feature, a type continuous action device related to a type 1 special feature, and a type 2 special feature. It is an ART that appears as if a continuous object operating device is operating.

  Here, in the present embodiment, even when a player who cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, a combination of symbols related to follow replay is displayed on the active line. Therefore, even a player who cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing can enjoy the game.

(Result screen A)
The result screen A is a screen that displays the number of medals acquired in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B. Then, after displaying the result screen A, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the withdrawal state A.

  In the result screen A, the number of games to be shifted to the Bonus ready state may be suggested. In this case, the sub CPU 412 needs to determine the number of games to shift to the Bonus preparation state before displaying the result screen A.

(Retraction state A)
The withdrawal state A is a state in which a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state A is performed when a predetermined winning area is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the winning areas “30” to “36” are determined, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery to move to the Bonus preparation state A, and based on the fact that the lottery is won, Control to shift to the Bonus preparation state A is performed. In the withdrawal state A, the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined, and the symbol combination related to the bell is not displayed on the effective line, and the symbol combination related to the blank is displayed on the effective line. Based on this, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the normal state.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the withdrawal state A, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined, the sub CPU 412 puts the combination of symbols related to the bell on the active line. There is no notification of an appropriate sequence of stop operations for display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the playability in the withdrawal state A is determined by determining the winning areas “30” to “36” and displaying the Bonus ready state before the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line. It is a game of winning a lottery that shifts to A.

(ART game number determination state)
The ART game number determination state includes an ART game number determination preparation state, an ART game number determination state A, and an ART game number determination state B. In the following, each ART game number determination state will be described.

(ART game number determination ready state)
When it is determined that the ART game number determination ready state shifts to the ART game number determination state, the sub CPU 412 determines the winning areas “20” to “27” by the internal lottery process described later after the Bonus state ends. In such a case, the control of informing the stop operation sequence display lamps 30a to 30c of the stop operation sequence of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 for displaying the combination of symbols related to the push order bell on the effective line. Do. In addition, the sub CPU 412 appropriately displays the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition replay on the active line when the winning area “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ART game number determination preparation state. The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is controlled by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game number determination state A or the ART game number determination state B based on the combination of symbols relating to the RT4 transition replay being displayed on the active line.

(ART game number determination state A)
The ART game number determination state A is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in the ART state. In addition, in the ART game number determination state A, when the BAR matching replay during RT4 is won, based on the number of navigation stocks to be described later, the stop buttons 11 and 12 are displayed on the active line for the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay. , 13 is controlled to be notified by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, based on the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay being displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 47) described later. A lottery of the number of games to be added is performed. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART state based on the combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination state A is shifted through the ART game number determination preparation state after acquiring navigation stock in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B.

(ART game number determination state B)
The ART game number determination state B is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in the ART state. In addition, in the ART game number determination state B, when RT4 BAR-matched replay is won, stop buttons 11 and 12 are displayed on the active line for combinations of symbols related to BAR replay based on the number of navigation stocks described later. , 13 is controlled to be notified by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, based on the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay being displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 47) described later. Control to add. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART state based on the combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination state B is transferred after the Bonus state C is completed, is transferred via the ART game number determination preparation state, and is determined in comparison with the ART game number determination state A. Since the number of ART games is large, it is advantageous for the player.

  Note that, after the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B is completed, the state may be shifted to the ART game number determination state B via the ART game number determination preparation state. In this case, it is conceivable to perform a lottery for shifting to the ART game number determination state B based on the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B. For example, the more the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B, the easier it is to move to the ART game number determination state B, and a lottery may be performed based on a lottery table in which lottery values are defined.

(ART state)
The ART state includes an ART game, a precursor stage B, a continuous effect C, an ART continuation screen, a Bonus preparation state B, a Bonus state during ART, and an additional number of ART games. In the ART state, in the ART game number determination state, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART state based on the combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay being displayed on the active line. Further, the sub CPU 412 displays the result screen B on the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the game number obtained by adding the number of games determined in the ART game number determination state and the number of games added in the ART state being played. After the display, control to shift to the pull-back state B is performed.

(ART game)
In the ART game, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 notifies the order of the stop operation for stopping the combination of symbols related to the bell on the effective line. Control is performed. Furthermore, in the ART state, as long as the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated in the order of the stop operation notified by the sub CPU 412, the main CPU 301 controls the RT2 to RT5 gaming states. In the internal lottery process described later, the probability of winning a re-game is higher than the RT0 or RT1 game state. For this reason, the ART state is an advantageous state for the player.

(A precursor stage B)
The precursor stage B is a stage that suggests transition to a Bonus preparation state B described later. The precursor stage B can be shifted from the ART game by the sub CPU 412. In addition, after the precursor stage B ends, the transition to the continuous effect C is made. In the present embodiment, in particular, the game shifts from the ART game to the precursor stage B before the predetermined number of games before the transition to the Bonus preparation state B determined based on the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table described later. The rate of being done is highly regulated. Similarly, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the ratio of the transition from the normal state to the precursor stage B before a predetermined number of games out of the range of the number of games with a high lottery value is defined. Highly regulated. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus preparation state B.

(Continuous production C)
The continuous effect C is an effect performed over a plurality of games. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control to notify the transition to the Bonus preparation state B by displaying the result of the continuous effect C on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420. In addition, the sub CPU 412 performs control for notifying the transition to the ART game by displaying the result of the continuous effect C on the liquid crystal display device 41 via the image control board 420.

(Bonus ready state B)
The Bonus preparation state B is a state before the transition to the Bonus state during ART, and includes three types of states: Bonus preparation A during ART, Bonus preparation B during ART, and Bonus notification during ART. Here, in the bonus preparation A during ART, when the winning areas “08” to “11” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 displays the combination of symbols related to the preparation replay on the active line. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART Bonus preparation state B based on the combination of symbols related to the preparation replay being displayed on the active line.

  Further, the sub CPU 412 displays the combination of symbols related to the push order bell on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the Bonus preparation B during ART. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus notification during ART based on determination of the winning areas “01” to “03” by the internal lottery process described later.

  Further, the sub CPU 412 sets the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c based on the lottery result using the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) described later when the Bonus is notified during ART. Control to notify the order of the stop operation is performed. As a result, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift from the during-ART Bonus state A to the during-ART Bonus state C based on the lottery result using the Bonus state distribution table.

  Here, based on the fact that the BAR1 symbols are aligned on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the Bonus state A during ART. Do. Further, based on the fact that the red 7 symbols are aligned on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the BON state B during ART. Do. On the other hand, based on the fact that the blue 7 symbols are aligned on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right rising line, or the right falling line, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART state Bonus state C. Do.

  When a combination of symbols related to follow replay is displayed on the active line, based on a lottery result using a Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) described later, the Bonus states A to ART during ART. Control to shift to any state of the middle Bonus state C is performed.

(Bonus state during ART)
In the Bonus state during ART, the Bonus state A during ART to the Bonus state C during ART are provided. In the following, each Bonus state will be described.

(Bonus state A during ART)
The Bonus state A during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the bonus state A during ART, the sub CPU 412 combines the symbols related to the push order bells when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 20 games. Is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, when the navigation stock described later is acquired during the 20 games, control is performed to shift to the ART game number addition state.

  Similarly to the Bonus state A, when the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay can be displayed on the active line after the end of the 20 games, control to shift to the ART game number additional state may be performed.

(Bonus state B during ART)
The Bonus state B during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the bonus state B during ART, the sub CPU 412 combines the symbols related to the push order bells when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 48 games. Is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Further, in the bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock lottery based on a winning area determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, and controls to shift to the ART game number determination state when the navigation stock is acquired. I do. The sub CPU 412 performs (a) the timing of winning the lottery to shift to the ART game number additional state, (b) after winning the lottery to shift to the ART game number additional state, and continuously performs a predetermined number of games. Control is performed to notify whether or not to shift to the ART game number addition state at any time of the end of the production, (c) the timing from 5 games before 48 games to the end game.

  Similar to the Bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 performs a meter rising lottery based on a winning area determined by an internal lottery process described later in the Bonus state B during ART. Based on the above, control for determining whether or not to shift to the ART game number determination state may be performed.

(Bus state C during ART)
The Bonus state C during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, in the case of the Bonus state C during ART, the sub CPU 412 combines the symbols related to the push order bells when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later for 48 games. Is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game number addition state based on the termination of the bonus state C during ART.

  Here, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the ART continuation screen when the ART game Bonus state A or the ART Bonus state B ends and the state does not shift to the ART game number addition state.

  In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 412 controls the bonus state during ART, the main CPU 301 controls the RT3 gaming state unless the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line. Yes. In the present embodiment, the RT3 gaming state is a combination of symbols related to a red 7 symbol, a blue 7 symbol, or a BAR 1 symbol on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right rising line, or the right falling line. Migrated when is displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state during ART is a type 1 special feature, a type 2 special feature, a type continuous action device related to a type 1 special feature, or a type 2 special feature. It is ART which showed that the accessory continuous action | operation apparatus which it concerns act | operates.

  Here, in the present embodiment, even when a player who cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, a combination of symbols related to follow replay is displayed on the active line. Therefore, even a player who cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing can enjoy the game.

(ART continuation screen)
The ART continuation screen is a screen that is displayed after the end of the Bonus state during ART when it is determined not to shift to the ART game number addition state in the Bonus state during ART. Further, after the ART continuation screen is displayed, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game.

(Art game added)
As the ART game number addition state, an ART game number addition preparation state, an ART game number addition state A, and an ART game number addition state B are provided. In the following, the state of adding the number of ART games will be described.

(Preparing state for adding ART games)
When it is determined that the ART game number addition preparation state shifts to the ART game number addition state, the sub CPU 412 performs winning areas “20” to “27” by an internal lottery process to be described later after the Bonus state during ART ends. Is determined, the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 in order to display the combination of symbols related to the push order bell on the effective line. Take control. In addition, the sub CPU 412 is appropriate for displaying the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition replay on the active line when the winning area “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ART game number addition preparation state. The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is controlled by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, based on the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition replay being displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game number additional state A or the ART game number additional state B.

(ART game number addition state A)
The ART game number addition state A is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in the ART state. In addition, in the state where the number of ART games is added, when the BAR matching replay during RT4 is won, a combination of symbols related to BAR replay is displayed on the active line based on the number of navigation stocks described later. , 13 is controlled to be notified by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, based on the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay being displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 47) described later. Control to add. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number addition state A is transferred via the ART game number addition preparation state after acquiring navigation stock in the Bonus state A during ART or the Bonus state B during ART.

(Art game number added state B)
The ART game number addition state B is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in the ART state. In addition, in the ART game number determination state B, when RT4 BAR-matched replay is won, stop buttons 11 and 12 are displayed on the active line for combinations of symbols related to BAR replay based on the number of navigation stocks described later. , 13 is controlled to be notified by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c. Then, based on the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay being displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 47) described later. Control to add. Further, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number added state B is advantageous to the player because the number of added games is larger than the ART game number added state A. In the present embodiment, the ART game number added state B is transferred after the ART game Bonus state C is completed and is transferred via the ART game number added preparation state, and is compared with the ART game number determined state A. Since the number of ART games to be played is large, the game is advantageous to the player.

  Alternatively, after the ART bonus state A or the ART bonus state B ends, the ART game number addition state B may be entered via the ART game number determination preparation state. In this case, it is conceivable to perform a lottery for shifting to the ART game number addition state B based on the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A during ART or the Bonus state B during ART. For example, the larger the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A during ART or the Bonus state B during ART, the easier it is to shift to the ART game number addition state B, and a lottery is performed based on a lottery table in which lottery values are defined. Can be considered.

(Result screen B)
The result screen B is a screen that displays the number of games played in the ART state, the number of acquired medals, and the like. Then, after displaying the result screen B, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the withdrawal state B.

(Retraction state B)
The withdrawal state B is a state in which a lottery for shifting to an ART game is performed when a predetermined winning area is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the winning areas “30” to “36” are determined, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery to shift to the ART game, and based on the fact that the lottery is won, the ART game Control to shift to. In the withdrawal state B, the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined, and the symbol combination related to the bell is not displayed on the effective line, and the symbol combination related to the blank is displayed on the effective line. Based on this, the sub CPU 412 performs control to shift to the normal state.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the withdrawal state B, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined, the sub CPU 412 places the combination of symbols related to the bell on the active line. There is no notification of an appropriate sequence of stop operations for display. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the playability in the withdrawal state B is determined by determining the winning areas “30” to “36” before the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line, It is a game of winning the lottery to be transferred.

(Status management table)
Next, the state management table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The state management table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and is provided for the sub CPU 412 to recognize the current state. Specifically, the state management table defines the state name and the number corresponding to each state name.

(Push order notification effect determination table)
Next, the push order notification effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The push order notification effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and defines which push order is notified when the sub CPU 412 notifies the push order. Specifically, the push order notification effect determination table is defined with respect to contents for notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the state name and the gaming state.

  For example, in the withdrawal state A, when the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, “RT3 replay navigation” or “RT4 transition replay removal navigation” is executed. Specifically, in the withdrawal state A, when the winning areas “13” to “19” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 displays the combination of symbols related to the normal replay on the active line. The control which alert | reports the stop operation order to be performed is performed.

  In the withdrawal state A, when the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, “RT2 continuous navigation” is executed. When the winning areas “01” to “03” are determined by the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 412 performs control to notify the stop operation order in which the combination of symbols related to the normal replay is displayed on the active line. .

(Production decision table 1)
Next, the effect determination table 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table 1 is provided in the sub ROM 414 and is provided for determining an effect performed in a normal state or the like. Specifically, “Production No.” and production contents corresponding to “Production No.” are defined.

  Further, the push order navigation of “effect No. 070” has different effects determined based on the winning area determined in the internal lottery process described later, the current state managed by the sub CPU 412, and the like. Specifically, the content of the effect is determined based on the push order notification effect determination table (see FIG. 35).

(Production decision table 2)
Next, the effect determination table 2 will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table 2 is provided in the sub ROM 414 and is provided for determining an effect performed in the Bonus state or the like. Specifically, as in the effect determination table 1, “effect No.” and effect contents corresponding to “effect No.” are defined.

  In addition, the effect determination table 2 executes the effect based on the determined winning area, the current state managed by the sub CPU 412, and the like in the internal lottery process described later, as in the effect determination table 1. The conditions are specified.

(Production decision table 3)
Next, the effect determination table 3 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table 3 is provided in the sub ROM 414 and is provided for determining an effect performed in the ART state or the like. Specifically, as with the effect determination table 1 and the effect determination table 2, the “effect No.” and the effect contents corresponding to “effect No.” are defined.

  In addition, the effect determination table 3 is similar to the effect determination table 1 and the effect determination table 2, based on the winning area determined in the internal lottery process described later, the current state managed by the sub CPU 412, and the like. Conditions for performing the production are defined.

(Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus ready state transition game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 414. In the pull back state A or the pull back state B, the Bonus ready state A is displayed when the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line. It is provided to determine the number of games before shifting to. Specifically, the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table defines the range of the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state A and the lottery value.

  The Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table is used when determining the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state B in the ART state when the symbol combination related to the RUSH replay is displayed on the active line. Is also used.

  Here, the lottery value of the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table is provided for each set value, and the lottery value defined for each range of the number of games differs for each set value. In particular, in the present embodiment, the lottery value in the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table is defined such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the sub CPU 412 determines the range of the faster game number. Accordingly, the higher the set value is, the higher the ratio of the sub CPU 412 that determines the short game number as the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state after the withdrawal state A or the withdrawal state B is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the probability that 129 to 133 games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is “0”. When the setting value is “6”, the probability that 129 to 133 games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is “2753/65536”. Accordingly, when the set value is “1”, since 129 to 133 games are not determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is established. When 129 to 133 games are determined, the player can recognize that the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is not “1”.

  In the present embodiment, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that 129 to 133 games will be determined as the number of games before the transition to the Bonus ready state. The lottery value is defined as follows. For this reason, the player can estimate the set value by overlapping the number of times that the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state is determined by playing the game for a long time.

  Note that a lottery value for determining 129 games to 133 games is defined as the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state only when a specific setting value (for example, the setting value is “6”). (For example, when the setting value is “1” to “5”), the lottery value for determining 129 games to 133 games may not be defined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. Thereby, when 129 games-133 games are determined as the number of games until it transfers to a Bonus preparation state, a player can recognize that it is a specific setting value.

  Further, a lottery value for determining 129 games to 133 games is defined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state only when a specific setting value (for example, the setting value is “4”) or more, and other settings In the case of a value (for example, the setting value is “1” to “3”), the lottery value for determining 129 games to 133 games may not be defined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. Thereby, when 129 games-133 games are determined as the number of games until it transfers to a Bonus preparation state, the player can recognize that it is more than a specific setting value.

(Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table for reset)
Next, the reset bonus preparation state transition game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reset-time bonus preparation state transition game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 414. Also, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table for reset transitions to the Bonus ready state in the Bonus ready state transition game number re-determination process (see step S405-1-10-1-6 in FIG. 89) described later. Used when redetermining the number of games. In the reset-time Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table, the range of the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state and the lottery value are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table in FIG. 39 is defined with a high probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state within the first number of games (for example, 128 games). For this reason, the player who knows that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first number of games is defined to be high is shifted to the Bonus ready state based on the Bonus ready state shift game number determination table. After the number of games is determined, it is assumed that the first game number game is performed and the game is ended. Then, the other player who knows that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first number of games is defined to be high is the gaming machine 1 that has finished the game after playing the first number of games. Since the game is not going to be played, the operation of the gaming machine falls.

  On the other hand, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table for reset is defined with a high probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first number of games (for example, 128 games). For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, the probability of selecting the reset of the number of bonus preparation state transition games described later and shifting to the bonus preparation state by the first number of games is In the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, compared with the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first game number without selecting the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number described later. Highly regulated.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 in which the first number of games have been played, a player who plays only a short number of games (for example, 128 games) should select to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games described later. It can be said that this is advantageous compared to the case where the resetting of the number of Bonus preparation state transition games to be described later is not selected.

  Further, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table indicates that the game machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed does not select the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number described later, 649 games ( 777 games-128 games), the lottery value is defined so as to shift to the Bonus ready state without fail. On the other hand, the reset-use Bonus ready state transition game number determination table 649 indicates that the game machine 1 in which the game of the first game number has been performed selects reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number to be described later. There is a possibility that the game does not enter the Bonus ready state within the game (777 games-128 games).

  For example, based on the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table in FIG. 39, 300 games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state, and after the first game number of games has been played, a description will be given later. Assuming that 700 games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is selected based on the reset Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table, and the Bonus preparation state transition game number is selected. The number of games required for the transition to is 700 games after selecting the reset of the number of bonus preparation state transition games described later.

  For this reason, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table for reset selects the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number to be described later in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first game number has been performed. The probability of transitioning to the Bonus ready state by a second game number (for example, 649 games) longer than the number of games (for example, 128 games) is the second without selecting the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number to be described later. It is specified to be lower than the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the number of games.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 in which the first number of games have been played, a player who plays only a short number of games (for example, 128 games) should select to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games described later. It can be said that this is advantageous compared to the case where the resetting of the number of Bonus preparation state transition games to be described later is not selected.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, a player who plays a long number of games (for example, 649 games) should not choose to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games described later. It can be said that this is more advantageous than the case where the resetting of the number of Bonus preparation state transition games described later is selected.

  In this embodiment, the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table for reset is defined such that the lottery value differs for each set value. The higher the set value, the shorter the range of the number of games is determined. It is easy to be done. In addition, when the reset of the number of bonus preparation state transition games described later is selected (step S308-9-3 = Yes in FIG. 105), 129 to 133 games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state. It is stipulated not to be.

  For this reason, when the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state is determined based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table for reset, the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is 129 to 133 games. Is not determined, the player cannot guess the set value.

  This is because when the player plays a long game and plays a long game number (for example, 649 games), when the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number is selected, the number of Bonus ready state transition games is This is an example that is disadvantageous compared to the case where reset is not selected.

(Self release mode lottery probability transition table)
Next, the self-releasing mode lottery probability transition table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The self-releasing mode lottery probability transition table is provided in the sub-ROM 414. Compared with a state where the probability of transitioning to the self-releasing mode is high (hereinafter referred to as “high probability state”) and the high probability state. It is provided for performing a lottery to shift a state having a low probability (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability state”). Here, in the present embodiment, when the current state is the low probability state, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state with the probability of each game “327/65536”. On the other hand, when the current state is a high probability state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state with a probability of each game “4096/65536”.

(Bonus state distribution table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state distribution table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and is provided to notify the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 to be notified when the winning areas “01” to “03” are determined. ing. In addition, the Bonus state distribution table defines the state to which the Bonus state A to the Bonus state C are shifted and the lottery value corresponding to each Bonus state. Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery value is provided for each set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of shifting to the Bonus state C.

  For example, if it is determined as a result of the lottery using the Bonus state distribution table that the transition to the Bonus state A is made, the combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay 01 can be stopped. Control to notify the operation order is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the right stop button 13 is first stopped when the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, a notification that the left stop button 11 is first stopped is given. On the other hand, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning area “03” is determined, the combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay is activated by notifying that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped. It is not displayed above.

  In addition, as a result of the lottery using the Bonus state distribution table, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus state B, the combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay 02 can be stopped. Control to notify the operation order is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the left stop button 11 is first stopped when the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, a notification that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped is given. On the other hand, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning area “03” is determined, the combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay is activated by notifying that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped. It is not displayed above.

  In addition, when it is determined as a result of the lottery using the Bonus state distribution table that the transition to the Bonus state C is made, the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 that can stop the combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay Control to notify the order is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 notifies that the left stop button 11 is first stopped when the winning area “03” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. On the other hand, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “01” or “02” is determined, a notification that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped is issued.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 414. After the lottery based on the Bonus state distribution table in FIG. 42 is determined to shift to the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B, the Bonus state A or the Bonus state is determined. It is provided for performing a lottery so as to shift to the Bonus state B or the Bonus state C before shifting to the state B.

  Specifically, the promotion lottery table is provided with (a) a promotion lottery table for waiting for the Bonus state A and (b) a promotion lottery table for waiting for the Bonus state B, and each promotion lottery table includes Defines a lottery value for each winning area and waiting for the transition to the Bonus state. For example, when the winning area “33” is determined while waiting for the Bonus state A, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery to shift to the Bonus state B standby at “32768/65536”. In addition, when the winning area “33” is determined while waiting for the Bonus state B, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery to move to the Bonus state C standby at “4128/65536”.

(ART lottery table in Bonus state B)
Next, the ART lottery table in the Bonus state B will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state B ART lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 414, and is provided in the Bonus state B for lottery of whether or not to shift to the ART state. Specifically, in the Bonus state B ART lottery table, a winning area and a lottery value corresponding to each winning area are defined. For example, when the winning area “33” is determined in the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery determined to shift to the ART state with a probability of “21692/65536”. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 412 performs control to add “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 and store it. When the value of the navigation stock storage area of the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more when the Bonus state B ends, the sub CPU 412 performs control to determine that the lottery for shifting to the ART state has been won.

  Here, as much as the value of the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415, the sub CPU 412 determines the winning areas “04” to “06” by the internal lottery process described later in the ART game number determination state. In this case, control is performed to notify the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in which the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay is displayed on the active line.

(Navistock extra lottery table)
Next, the navigation stock addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and is provided for performing an extra lottery for the number of navigation stocks after winning the lottery based on the ART lottery table during the Bonus state B. Specifically, in the Navistock addition lottery table, a winning area and a lottery value corresponding to each winning area are defined. For example, when the winning area “33” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 412 performs the lottery by adding the number of navigation stocks with a probability of “13107/65536”. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 412 performs control to add “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 and store it.

(ART lottery table during Bonus state A)
Next, the ART lottery table during the Bonus state A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state A ART lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART state in the Bonus state A. Specifically, in the Bonus state A ART lottery table, a winning area, the number of navigation stocks, and a lottery value corresponding to each winning area and the number of navigation stocks are defined. For example, when the winning area “33” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 412 determines to add “0” for the number of navigation stocks with a probability of “26214/65536”. It is determined that the number of navigation stock “1” is added at a probability of “/ 65536”, the navigation stock number “2” is added at a probability of “3277/65536”, and the probability of “3277/65536” is determined. A lottery to determine that the number of navigation stock “3” is to be added is performed. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 412 performs control to add and store the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the lottery result in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the value of the navigation stock storage area of the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more when the Bonus state A ends, the sub CPU 412 performs control to determine that the lottery for shifting to the ART state has been won.

(Additional game number determination table)
Next, the added game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The additional game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 414. Based on the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay displayed on the active line in the ART game number determination state A or the ART game number determination state B, It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the value of the ART game number storage area of the sub RAM 415.

  Further, the added game number determination table is (a) a lottery table (hereinafter referred to as “the ART game number determination state A”) when a combination of symbols related to the BAR replay 01 or the BAR replay 03 is displayed on the active line. (Referred to as “the lottery table for BAR replay 01, 03 establishment during ART game number determination state A”) and (b) in the ART game number determination state A, when a combination of symbols related to BAR replay 02 is displayed on the active line And a symbol relating to the BAR replay 01 or the BAR replay 03 in the ART game number determination state B (hereinafter referred to as “the lottery table for when the BAR replay 02 is established during the ART game number determination state A”). The lottery table used when a combination of (Referred to as “the lottery table for BAR replay 01, 03 establishment during ART game number determination state B”) and (d) in the ART game number determination state B, a combination of symbols related to BAR replay 02 is displayed on the active line. A lottery table (hereinafter referred to as a “lottery table for establishing BAR replay 02 during ART game number determination state B”) is provided. Then, a lottery table for when BAR replay 01, 03 is established during ART game number determination state A, a lottery table for when BAR replay 02 is established during ART game number determination state A, and BAR replay 01, 03 is established during ART game number determination state B. The lottery table and the lottery table for when the BAR replay 02 is established during the ART game number determination state B are respectively defined for the number of added games and the lottery value.

  For example, in the ART game number determination state A, when the symbol combination related to BAR Replay 01 or BAR Replay 03 is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 412 has the probability of “49086/65536” as the number of additional games. “10” game is determined, “20” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “5308/65536”, “30” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “5308/65536”, With the probability of “5308/65536”, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games, “100” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “262/65536”, and with the probability of “132/65536” , "200" games are determined as the number of additional games, and the probability is "132/65536" Performing a lottery to determine the "300" game as the number of games.

  In the ART game number determination state A, the BAR replay 01, 03 establishment lottery table is displayed when the combination of symbols related to BAR replay 01 or BAR replay 03 is displayed on the active line in the ART game number addition state A. Also used for. Similarly, the BAR replay 02 establishment lottery table during ART game number determination state A is also used when the combination of symbols related to BAR replay 02 is displayed on the active line in the ART game number addition state A. Similarly, in the ART game number determination state B during the BAR replay 01, 03 establishment lottery table, in the ART game number addition state B, the symbol combination related to BAR replay 01 or BAR replay 03 is displayed on the active line. Also used in some cases. Similarly, the lottery table for establishment of the BAR replay 02 in the ART game number determination state B is also used when the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay 02 is displayed on the active line in the ART game number addition state B.

(Navistock lottery table for ART game number determination state)
Next, an ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 414, and is provided for lottery navigation stock in the ART game number determination state. Specifically, the navigation game lottery table for the ART game number determination state defines the number of navigation stocks and the lottery values corresponding to the winning areas and the number of navigation stocks. For example, when the winning area “33” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 412 determines to add “1” to the navigation stock number with the probability of “62916/65536”. It is determined that the navigation stock number “2” is added with the probability of “/ 65536”, the navigation stock number “3” is added with the probability of “655/65536”, and the probability of “655/65536” is determined. It is determined that the navigation stock number “4” is added, and a lottery is performed to determine that the navigation stock number “5” is added with a probability of “655/65536”. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 412 performs control to add and store the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the lottery result in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the program start process is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1 is set, and a process of setting the register address is performed based on the table. Then, when the process of step S1 ends, the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, a check sum of the main RAM 303 is calculated, and when the calculation is completed, a process of setting the check sum of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the checksum (CheckSum) is a kind of code for detecting an error. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S <b> 3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the setting change switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change switch is turned on by rotating a predetermined angle while a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. Therefore, in step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the key is inserted into the keyhole. When it is determined that the setting change switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and when it is determined that the setting change switch is OFF (step S3 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the door opening / closing switch is ON. In the present embodiment, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, the door opening / closing switch is turned on. For this reason, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more. If it is determined that the door opening / closing switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing switch is OFF (step S4 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 sets a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change switch is ON (step S3 = Yes) and the door opening / closing switch is OFF (step S4 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. In this state, the key is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 sets a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S5 ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a power interruption recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the saved register value and the saved stack pointer value when power supply is started after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Perform processing to restore. In the power interruption recovery process, an initialization process of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S6 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a power-on command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the power-on command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the power-on command to the sub-control board 400. Here, the power-on command is a command having information indicating that the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation start command. Specifically, when the setting change switch is ON (step S3 = Yes) and the door opening / closing switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the main CPU 301 issues a setting change device operation start command to the sub control board. In order to transmit to 400, the setting change device operation start command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Here, the setting change device operation start command is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is turned on and starts setting change. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value and determines whether or not the set value range is normal. Here, when the determination result is normal, a process of displaying the current set value on the stored number display 25 or the setting display unit 36 is performed. On the other hand, if the above determination result is not normal, the initial set value of the set value is set in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then the set value is displayed in the stored number display 25 or the setting display unit 36. Processing to display the initial value of. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching display process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw, and the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The setting value is determined based on the setting value, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 based on the detection that the setting change key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. To store in the set value storage area. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a stored number display / acquired number display LED lighting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 issues a command to display the stored number and paid-out number on the stored number display unit 25 connected to the relay board 200 via the I / F circuit 305 and the paid-out number display unit 27. Do. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change device operation end command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change device operation end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the setting change device operation end command is a command having information that the set value has been changed and information related to the changed set value. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stack pointer and initializing the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, a process for clearing the payout number and a process for setting the current gaming state are performed. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs an overflow display process. Specifically, based on the fact that the auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530 s detects that the medal stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full, the main CPU 301 pays out via the relay board 200. A process of displaying a predetermined error by the number display 27 is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined error display is performed on the payout number display 27. However, the display is not limited to this, and the display may be performed using another display device or a lamp. By a plurality of devices such as the display 27 and the liquid crystal display device 41. Notification may be performed.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a medal acceptance start process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting the reception of medals when the re-game is not operating. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the set value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S10. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion check process and the like. Then, when the process of step S106 ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an input / discharge sensor check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the main CPU 301 detects an abnormality of the medal sensor 16s or a payout sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper 520, the main CPU 301 performs a process of displaying the detected abnormality. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning area by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to execute the spinning effect based on the winning area determined in step S109. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum one game time. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating reel 17 and the like. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of rotating the reel 17 at a constant speed by driving the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the operable state flag in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the operable state flag storage area is provided corresponding to each of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. The operable state flag is used to determine whether or not the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be stopped. For example, when all the operable state flags corresponding to the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are all ON, the main CPU 301 determines that all the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be stopped. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 17 based on the fact that the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. . Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a stop request. Specifically, in step S115, it is determined whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation performed on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player, and the rotating reel 17 is stopped. If it is determined that there is a stop request (step S116 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117. If it is determined that there is no stop request (step S116 = No), the process proceeds to step S118. To migrate.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel stop command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the reel stop command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel stop command relates to information relating to the type of the reel 17 that has been stopped, and the symbol position when the stop switch 11sw, 12sw, 13sw detects a stop operation on the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player. It is a command having information and information relating to a symbol code corresponding to the symbol position. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have been stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all the reels 17 are stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that all reels have been stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119, and if it is determined that all reels have not been stopped (step S118 = No). Then, the process proceeds to step S114, and the same process is repeatedly executed until all reels are stopped.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are being operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an OFF edge of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw is detected. When it is determined that the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are being operated (step S119 = Yes), the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed until the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are not being operated. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are not being operated (step S119 = No), the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs an input / discharge sensor check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of displaying the detected abnormality when detecting an abnormality of the medal sensor 16s or a payout sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper 520, as in step S107. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S122.

(Step S122)
In step S122, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing such as paying out medals by driving the hopper 520 through the power supply substrate 500. Then, when the process of step S122 ends, the process proceeds to step S123.

(Step S123)
In step S123, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S123 ends, the process proceeds to step S101 and is repeated.

(Medal reception start processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the medal acceptance start process performed by the process of step S104 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 51 shows a subroutine for medal acceptance start processing.

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a re-game operation. Specifically, based on the value of the re-game in-operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 determines whether a combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed on the active line in the previous game. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S104-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-3, and if it is determined that the re-game operation is not being performed (step S104). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for permitting medal insertion acceptance. Specifically, since the main CPU 301 determines in step S104-1 that the replay is not operating (step S104-1 = No), the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting medal insertion acceptance to the medal insertion slot 6. When the process of step S104-2 is completed, the medal acceptance process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic charging standby time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a time for automatically inserting medals used in the previous game because the combination of symbols related to the re-game is displayed on the active line in the previous game. I do. Then, when the process of step S104-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S <b> 104-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is in an automatic charging standby state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the automatic charging standby time set in the process of step S104-3 has elapsed. If it is determined that the automatic charging standby time is set (step S104-4 = Yes), the process of step S104-4 is repeatedly executed until the automatic charging standby time elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the automatic charging standby time (step S104-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-5.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the re-game display lamp is lit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the re-game display lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, so that the re-game display lamp 29 is on. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the re-game display lamp is lit (step S104-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-8, and it is determined that the re-game display lamp is not lit. (Step S104-5 = No), the process proceeds to Step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the medal automatic insertion command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the automatic medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. Here, the medal automatic insertion command is a command having information indicating that a medal used in the previous game is automatically inserted. Then, when the process of step S104-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-7.

(Step S104-7)
In step S104-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game display lamp lighting flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on a re-game display lamp lighting flag in a lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-8.

(Step S104-8)
In step S104-8, the main CPU 301 performs medal insertion number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal insertion number counter of the main RAM 303 with the upper limit being the number of medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S104-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-9.

(Step S104-9)
In step S104-9, the main CPU 301 performs BET lamp display data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating lighting data for the BET lamp 24 and turning on the BET lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-10.

(Step S104-10)
In step S104-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the combination of symbols related to replay on the active line, and adds “1” to the value of the medal insertion number counter in the process of step S104-8, so that the main RAM 303 is inserted. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3” (step S104-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-11, and the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not (step S104-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-12.

(Step S104-11)
In step S104-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the replay medal limit flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the replay medal limit flag in the medal limit flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-12.

(Step S104-12)
In step S104-12, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal is a limit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the data in the medal limit flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the replay medal limit flag is turned ON in the process of step S104-11. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the medal is the limit (step S104-12 = Yes), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal is not the limit (step S104-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-4, and the same process is repeatedly executed until the medal reaches the limit.

(Medal management process)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the medal management process performed by the process of step S106 in FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of medal management processing.

(Step S106-1)
In step S <b> 106-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is a re-game operation. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S106-1 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the re-game operation (step S106-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-2.

(Step S106-2)
In step S106-2, the main CPU 301 performs medal insertion check processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first performs a process of determining whether or not an appropriate medal has been inserted by the medal sensor 16s. Next, when an appropriate medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16s, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. In addition, when the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3” and the appropriate medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16s, the main CPU 301 is the maximum value of the number of medals that can be stored in the gaming machine 1. A process of adding “1” to the value of the medal stored number counter in the main RAM 303 is performed up to 50 ”. Further, when a normal medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16 s, the main CPU 301 stores the medal insertion command in the transmission data for effect in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set the area. Here, the medal insertion command is a command having information indicating that an appropriate medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Then, when the process of step S106-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-3.

(Step S106-3)
In step S <b> 106-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a BET button operation can be accepted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the 1 BET button operable flag and the MAX-BET button operable flag in the operation unit acceptance permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are ON. , A process of determining whether or not the BET buttons 7 and 8 are operable is performed. If it is determined that the BET button operation can be accepted (step S106-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-4, and if it is determined that the BET button operation cannot be accepted. (Step S106-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S106-9.

(Step S106-4)
In step S106-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the 1BET button has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw. If it is determined that the 1BET button has been operated (step S106-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-5, and if it is determined that the 1BET button has not been operated (step S106). -4 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-7.

(Step S106-5)
In step S106-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-6.

(Step S106-6)
In step S106-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-7.

(Step S106-7)
In step S106-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the MAX-BET button has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw. If it is determined that the MAX-BET button has been operated (step S106-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-8, and if it is determined that the MAX-BET button has not been operated. (Step S106-7 = No), the process proceeds to Step S106-9.

(Step S106-8)
In step S106-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-9.

(Step S106-9)
In step S106-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal insertion request counter in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3” (step S106-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-11, and the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not (step S106-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-10.

(Step S106-10)
In step S106-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal stored number counter in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the medal stored number counter is “1” or more (step S106-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-11, and the value of the medal stored number counter is “1”. If it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to “No” (step S106-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-2.

(Step S106-11)
In step S106-11, the main CPU 301 performs a stored game medal insertion process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the medals provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to set the value of the input number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S106-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-12.

(Step S106-12)
In step S106-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the settlement button 9 has been operated by the settlement switch 9sw. If it is determined that the settlement switch is OFF (step S106-12 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 in the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the settlement switch is not OFF (step S106-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-13.

(Step S106-13)
In step S106-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-14.

(Step S106-14)
In step S106-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a medal settlement. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw when the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. Process. If it is determined that the medal has been settled (step S106-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-15, and if it is determined that the medal has not been settled (step S106-14). = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Step S106-15)
In step S106-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal settlement command. Specifically, when it is determined in step S106-14 that there is a medal settlement (step S106-14 = Yes), the main CPU 301 sends the medal settlement command to the sub control board 400 in order to transmit the medal settlement command. Processing for setting the settlement command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal settlement command is a command having information that the medal has been settled by the player. Then, when the process of step S106-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-16.

(Step S106-16)
In step S106-16, the main CPU 301 performs medal settlement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 pays out one medal by the hopper 520 and then subtracts “1” from the medal stored number counter value in the main RAM 303 until the medal stored number counter value becomes “0”. By paying out medals, a process of paying out medals stored in the gaming machine 1 is performed. When the process of step S106-16 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Input / exit sensor check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the input / withdrawal sensor check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 50 and the process of step S121 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of input / withdrawal sensor check processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S <b> 107-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the making sensor has detected an abnormality. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the input sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Here, in the present embodiment, when the medal sensor 16s detects an abnormality, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the insertion sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the input sensor has detected an abnormality (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the input sensor has not detected an abnormality. (Step S107-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S107-5.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a making sensor abnormal input error display request. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of requesting display of an insertion sensor abnormality input error in order to notify that the medal sensor 16s has detected an abnormality. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs an insertion sensor abnormality display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of displaying on the payout number display 27 that the medal sensor 16s has detected an abnormality via the relay board 200. Then, when the process of step S107-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-4.

(Step S107-4)
In step S <b> 107-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the making sensor abnormality detection flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the input sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout sensor has detected an abnormality. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the payout sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Here, in this embodiment, when a payout sensor (not shown) detects an abnormality, a process of turning on the payout sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When it is determined that the dispensing sensor has detected an abnormality (step S107-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-6, and when it is determined that the input sensor has not detected an abnormality. (Step S107-5 = No), the subroutine of the input / withdrawal sensor check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-6)
In step S107-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a payout sensor abnormality input error display request. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for requesting display of a payout sensor abnormality input error in order to notify that a payout sensor (not shown) has detected an abnormality. Then, when the process of step S107-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-7.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs payout sensor abnormality display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of displaying on the payout number display 27 that a payout sensor (not shown) has detected an abnormality via the relay board 200. Then, when the process of step S107-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs control to turn off the payout sensor abnormality detection flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the payout sensor abnormality detection flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-8 is completed, the subroutine for the input / withdrawal sensor check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S108 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S108-1)
In step S <b> 108-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the operation of the start lever can be accepted. Here, in the present embodiment, when the value of the medal insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, the operation of the start lever can be accepted. If it is determined that the start lever operation is acceptable (step S108-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-2, and it is determined that the start lever operation is not acceptable. (Step S108-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S108-5.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-3.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-4. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108- 3 = No), the start lever check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-5.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-5 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 55, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs an error check process before random number lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for checking a setting value error based on a setting value stored in a setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a hard random number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting a random number value generated by the random number generator 304. Here, when the main CPU 301 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generator 304, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing it in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

  In this embodiment, when the winning area is determined, a hard random number is acquired by the random number generator 304. However, a soft random number that extracts a numerical value within a certain range using a software counter is used. It is good also as acquiring. In this case, the internal lottery process can be executed without providing the random number generator 304.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, a process for acquiring a non-RT gaming state or an RT gaming state is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of lotteries based on the gaming state acquired by the process of step S109-3. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines the number of lottery times, regardless of whether the gaming state acquired by the process of step S109-3 is a non-RT gaming state or an RT gaming state. 37 "is acquired. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning area offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains a winning area offset value every time the process of step S109-5 is performed until the lottery of all winning areas is completed from the winning area “00” which is the reference value. I do. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a replay lottery time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a replay lottery based on the winning area offset value acquired in step S109-5. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that it is a replay lottery when the winning area offset values are “01” to “19”. If it is determined that the replay lottery is being performed (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-7. If it is determined that the replay lottery is not being performed (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the RT type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the current gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the gaming state acquired by the process of step S109-3 is the RT gaming state. Performs processing for acquiring any of the RT1 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a winning area for performing a lottery based on the RT gaming state acquired by the process of step S109-7. Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not to draw a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the gaming state acquired in step S109-3, the RT type acquired in step S109-7, and the winning area acquired in step S109-8. Then, a process for determining whether or not to draw is performed. And when it determines with not lottery (step S109-9 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S109-14, and when it determines with lottery (step S109-9 = No), step S109- The processing is shifted to 10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs flag data acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring flag data based on the winning area acquired by the process of step S109-8. For example, when the winning area is “30”, the flag data related to “NML20” to “NML23” is acquired. Then, when the process of step S109-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to refer to the setting common table. Here, in the present embodiment, a winning area with different lottery values and a winning area using a common lottery value are provided according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. ing. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to refer to the setting common table based on the winning area acquired by the process of step S109-8. If it is determined to refer to the setting common table (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13, and if it is determined not to refer to the setting common table (step S109--). 11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a setting value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a set value with reference to a set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-13.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring lottery data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires one of the RT0 winning area determination table to the RT5 winning area determination table stored in the main ROM 302 based on the RT type acquired in step S109-7. Based on the acquired winning area determination table, the winning area offset value acquired by the process of step S109-5, and the winning area acquired by the process of step S109-8, a process of acquiring a lottery value is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired in step S109-13 from the random number value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area of the main RAM 303, and whether or not borrowing has been performed. The process which determines is performed. When the borrowing is performed, it is determined that the winning area corresponding to the current winning area offset value is won. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-15. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not been won (step S109-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs data storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing a winning area based on the winning area offset value acquired by the process of step S109-5 in a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing the flag data acquired by the processing in step S109-10 in a flag data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S109-15 ends, the internal lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining that the lottery has been completed when the lottery of all the winning areas defined in the winning area determination table corresponding to the current gaming state has been performed. If it is determined that the lottery has ended (step S109-16 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery has not ended (step S109-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-5, and the same process is repeatedly executed until the lottery ends.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of acquiring a winning area. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a soft random number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a random value for performing a lottery of the spinning effect in the process of step S110-3 described later. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

  In this embodiment, when determining the spinning effect, a soft random number for extracting a numerical value within a certain range is obtained using a counter on software. It is good also as acquiring.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects a rotation effect that can be determined by lottery based on the winning area acquired by the process of step S110-1 and the rotation effect table shown in FIG. Next, the main CPU 301 has a spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the selected spinning effect, a gaming state stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and step S110. Based on the soft random number acquired by the process -2, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a lottery effect lottery has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the spinning effect lottery in the process of step S110-3 has been won. If it is determined that the lottery for the spinning effect has been won (step S110-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-5, and it is determined that the lottery for the rotating effect is not won. In this case (step S110-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-6.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the corresponding turning effect 01-04 flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the rotation effect flag 01 flag to the rotation effect in the rotation effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the lottery result of the rotation effect lottery process in step S110-3. Processing to turn on the flag 04 flag is performed. Here, the rotation effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 includes a rotation effect flag 01 storage area, a rotation effect flag 02 storage area, a rotation effect flag 03 storage area, and a rotation effect flag 04 storage area. Is provided. Then, when the process of step S110-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-6.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on data stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display permission symbol bit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the display permission symbol storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the flag data stored in the flag data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S110-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-8.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the spinning effect 01 flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the turning effect 01 flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the rotation effect 01 flag is ON (step S110-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9, and it is determined that the rotation effect 01 flag is not ON. (Step S110-8 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-10.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs a waiting time setting process for the spinning effect 01. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time corresponding to the spinning effect 01 in the timer counter. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start acceptance command is a command having information indicating that the start of rotation of the reel 17 has been accepted. When the process of step S110-10 is completed, the symbol code setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start processing)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 57 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a minimum of one game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S111-2 described later has become “0” in the previous game. When it is determined that the minimum one game time has elapsed (step S111-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2, and when it is determined that the minimum one game time has not elapsed. (Step S111-1 = No), the process of Step S111-1 is repeatedly executed until a minimum of one game time elapses.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a minimum one game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 does not have a time from the process of step S111-2 in the previous game to the process of step S111-1 in the current game is less than one minimum game time in order to suppress gambling for the game. As described above, a process of setting the minimum one game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum one game time is about 4.1 seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-3.

(Step S111-3)
In step S <b> 111-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the rotation effect execution. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines which one of the turning effect flag 01 to the turning effect flag 04 in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the rotation effect is being executed (step S111-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not being executed ( Step S111-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-5.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect flag 01 flag to the turning effect flag 04 in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are ON. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether only the rotation effect flag corresponding to the rotation effect that is performed during the reel rotation start preparation process is ON. As a result, it is not necessary to check all the spinning effect flags.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the spinning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the rendering block table (see FIGS. 25 to 26), the rendering phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the spinning cylinder. Based on the performance execution table (see FIGS. 30 to 31), processing for executing the spinning performance is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-5.

(Step S111-5)
In step S111-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time until the rotation speed of the reel 17 reaches a constant speed. Then, when the process of step S111-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6.

(Step S111-6)
In step S111-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that the rotation of the reel 17 is started. Then, when the process of step S111-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S111-7)
In step S111-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of reels being rotated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the left reel rotation flag, the middle reel rotation flag, and the right reel rotation flag in the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-7 ends, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S112 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 58 shows a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” equal to the number of reels 17 as a predicted pull-in reel search initial value in a predicted pull-in reel search count storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a search target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a search target reel with reference to an expected pull-in reel search frequency storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S112-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-3.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the reel state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of acquiring the state of the reel 17 corresponding to the search target reel acquired in step S112-2. . Then, when the process of step S112-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the search target reel 17 is rotating based on the search target reel acquired in step S112-2 and the reel status acquired in step S112-3. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-5, and if it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112- 4 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-6.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position and performs a process of acquiring the pull-in priority. Next, the main CPU 301 acquires a predicted pull-in reel, sets a predicted pull-in data address, and confirms the stop position. Next, if the stop position is not “00”, the main CPU 301 corrects the stop position and stores the drawing priority order in the drawing priority order storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the virtual stop position and determines whether or not the search is completed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the pull-in priority order and storing the pull-in priority order in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 until the search is completed. Then, when the process of step S112-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-6.

(Step S112-6)
In step S112-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the search target reel is stopped in the process of step S112-4 (step S112-4 = No) or in the process of step S112-5. When the pull-in prediction process is completed, a process for acquiring the next deposit target reel is performed. Then, when the process of step S112-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-7.

(Step S112-7)
In step S112-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not all reels have been processed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all the reels 17 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S112-7 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S112-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-2, and the same process is performed until all reels have been processed. Repeatedly.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S115 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 59 shows a subroutine for reel rotation processing.

(Step S115-1)
In step S115-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw have detected the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S115-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S115-3, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S115). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S115-2.

(Step S115-2)
In step S115-2, the main CPU 301 performs a stop button reception permission flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stop button reception permission flag in the operation unit receivable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on whether or not the stop operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be performed. Process to update data. When the process of step S115-2 ends, the subroutine for the reel rotation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S116 of the main loop process.

(Step S115-3)
In step S115-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the third stop time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the third stop time based on the data of the stop button reception permission flag in the operation unit reception enabled state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that it is the third stop time (step S115-3 = Yes), the subroutine of the reel rotation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the time of the third stop (step S115-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S115-4.

(Step S115-4)
In step S115-4, the main CPU 301 performs a state check process on the target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of checking the state of the target reel based on the reel rotation flag data in the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S115-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S115-5.

(Step S115-5)
In step S115-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the target reel is stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the target reel is stopped based on the reel rotation flag data in the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the target reel is stopped (step S115-5 = Yes), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the target reel is not stopped (step S115-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S115-6.

(Step S115-6)
In step S115-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the target reel is rotating at a constant speed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the target reel is rotating at a constant speed based on data stored in a reel state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the target reel is rotating at a constant speed (step S115-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S115-7. On the other hand, if it is determined that the target reel is not rotating at a constant speed (step S115-6 = No), the reel rotating process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S116 of the main loop process.

  The reel state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is an area for storing whether or not the rotation speed of each reel 17 is rotating at a constant speed.

(Step S115-7)
In step S115-7, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control reel setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the current target reel as a stop control reel. Then, when the process of step S115-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S115-8.

(Step S115-8)
In step S115-8, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing reference position acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the pressing reference position based on the target reel and the counter value of the pulses supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, and the pressing reference position provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S115-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S115-9.

(Step S115-9)
In step S115-9, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a sliding frame number determination table (not shown), data stored in a pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and data stored in a press reference position storage area. Based on the above, the number of sliding frames is acquired. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S115-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S115-10.

(Step S115-10)
In step S115-10, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is set by the process of step S115-7 based on the pressing reference position acquired by the process of step S115-9 and the number of sliding frames acquired by the process of step S115-10. Processing to stop the stop control reel is performed. When the process of step S115-10 ends, the subroutine for the reel rotation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S116 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the display determination process performed by the process of step S120 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S120-1)
In step S120-1, the main CPU 301 performs display determination abnormality detection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the symbols displayed on the effective line based on the data in the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the data in the flag data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. It is determined whether or not the combination is abnormal. Here, the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 is an area for storing data relating to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line. Then, when the process of step S120-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-2.

(Step S120-2)
In step S120-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not display determination is abnormal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an abnormality has been detected by the display determination abnormality detection process in step S120-1. If it is determined that the display determination is abnormal (step S120-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-3, and if it is determined that the display determination is not abnormal (step S120-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S120-5.

(Step S120-3)
In step S120-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an illegal winning error. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on an illegal winning error flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-4.

(Step S120-4)
In step S120-4, the main CPU 301 performs non-recoverable error processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the result of the process of step S120-1 is abnormal in the process of step S120-2 (step S120-2 = Yes). Since the combination of symbols that has not been displayed is displayed on the active line, an unrecoverable error process is performed. Then, when the process of step S120-4 ends, the main CPU 301 ends the process without returning to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S120-5)
In step S120-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not replay display is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay is displayed based on data stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the regame display is being performed (step S120-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-6, and if it is determined that the regame display is not being performed (step S120). −5 = No), and the process proceeds to step S120-8.

(Step S120-6)
In step S120-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a re-game operation command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a re-game operation command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the re-game operation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the re-game operation command is a command having information indicating that a combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S120-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-7.

(Step S120-7)
In step S120-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game in-operation flag in the re-game in-operation flag storage area of the main RAM 303. When the process of step S120-7 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-8)
In step S120-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the winning symbol is displayed (step S120-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-9, and when it is determined that the winning symbol is not displayed (step S120). −8 = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-9)
In step S120-9, the main CPU 301 performs an effective line number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of effective lines of the gaming machine 1. Here, in this embodiment, since the effective line is only the right-downward line, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “1” as the number of effective lines. Then, when the process of step S120-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-10.

  In the present embodiment, the number of effective lines is “1” because the effective lines are only right-down lines. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and a plurality of effective lines can be set.

(Step S120-10)
In step S120-10, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the data stored in the display combination storage area and the symbol combination tables of FIGS. Then, when the process of step S120-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-11.

(Step S120-11)
In step S120-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process for the number of valid lines has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout number has been calculated by the payout number calculation process in step S120-10 for the number of effective lines acquired in the effective line number acquisition process in step S120-9. Do. And when it determines with the process for the number of effective lines having been complete | finished (step S120-11 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S120-12, and determines with the process for the number of effective lines not having been completed If it is determined (step S120-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-9, and the same process is repeatedly executed until the process for the number of valid lines is completed.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of effective lines is “1”, it is not determined that the processing for the number of effective lines is not completed (step S120-11 = No).

(Step S120-12)
In step S120-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the maximum payout number per game is exceeded. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum payout number per game is “15”. When the process of step S120-12 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Payment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 61, the payout process performed by the process of step S122 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 61 shows a payout processing subroutine.

(Step S122-1)
In step S122-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is a re-game operation time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S122-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S122-3, and if it is determined that the re-game operation is not being performed (step S122). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S122-2.

(Step S122-2)
In step S122-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the payout number calculated in the payout number calculation process in step S 120-10 in a payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S122-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-3.

(Step S122-3)
In step S122-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a payout medal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a payout medal based on the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that there is a payout medal (step S122-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S122-4, and if it is determined that there is no payout medal (step S122-3 = No). ), The payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123 of the main loop process.

(Step S122-4)
In step S122-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a medal payout start command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the medal payout start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal payout start command is a command having information indicating that the medal payout starts. Then, when the process of step S122-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S122-5.

(Step S122-5)
In step S122-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal storage number is a limit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. Here, when the value of the medal stored number counter is “50”, the main CPU 301 determines that the medal stored number is the limit, and when the value of the medal stored number counter is less than “50”, It is determined that the medal storage number is not the limit. When it is determined that the medal storage number is the limit (step S122-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S122-7, and when it is determined that the medal storage number is not the limit ( Step S122-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S122-6.

(Step S122-6)
In step S122-6, the main CPU 301 performs a stored number addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and subtracts “1” from the value of the medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S122-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-9.

(Step S122-7)
In step S122-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting payout number data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S122-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-8.

(Step S122-8)
In step S122-8, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to pay out one medal by driving the hopper 520 through the power supply board 500. Then, when the process of step S122-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-9.

(Step S122-9)
In step S122-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal payout has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal payout number counter stored in the main RAM 303 is “0”. When it is determined that the medal payout has ended (step S122-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S122-10, and when it is determined that the medal payout has not ended ( Step S122-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S122-5, and the same process is repeated until the medal payout is completed.

(Step S122-10)
In step S122-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout end command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a medal payout end command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the medal payout end command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal payout end command is a command having information indicating that the medal payout has ended. When the process of step S122-10 is completed, the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 62, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S123 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S123-1)
In step S123-1, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S123-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S123-2.

(Step S123-2)
In step S123-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a gaming state command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the gaming state command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the gaming state to the sub-control board 400. Here, the gaming state command is a command having information indicating which gaming state is the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state. Then, when the process of step S123-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S123-3.

(Step S123-3)
In step S123-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the rotation effect execution. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines which one of the turning effect flag 01 to the turning effect flag 04 in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the spinning effect is being executed (step S123-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-4, and if it is determined that the spinning effect is not being executed ( Step S123-3 = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect flag 01 flag to the turning effect flag 04 in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are ON. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether only the turning effect flag corresponding to the turning effect that is performed during the game state transition process is ON. As a result, it is not necessary to check all the spinning effect flags.

(Step S123-4)
In step S123-4, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the spinning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the rendering block table (see FIGS. 25 to 26), the rendering phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the spinning cylinder. Based on the performance execution table (see FIGS. 30 to 31), processing for executing the spinning performance is performed. Then, when the process of step S123-4 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 63, the RT game state transition process performed by the process of step S123-1 of FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-1)
In step S123-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S123-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S123-1-2.

(Step S123-1-2)
In step S123-1-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT0 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S123-1-1 is the RT0 gaming state. If it is determined that the player is in the RT0 gaming state (step S123-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-3. If it is determined that the player is not in the RT0 gaming state ( The process proceeds to step S123-1-2 = No) and step S123-1-4.

(Step S123-1-3)
In step S123-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT0 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S123-1-3 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-4)
In step S123-1-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S123-1-1 is the RT1 gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the RT1 gaming state (step S123-1-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-5, and if it is determined that the game is not in the RT1 gaming state ( Step S123-1-4 = No) and the process proceeds to Step S123-1-6.

(Step S123-1-5)
In step S123-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT1 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S123-1-5 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-6)
In step S123-1-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S123-1-1 is the RT2 gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the RT2 gaming state (step S123-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7. If it is determined that the game is not in the RT2 gaming state ( The process proceeds to step S123-1-6 = No) and step S123-1-8.

(Step S123-1-7)
In step S123-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT2 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the processing of step S123-1-7 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-8)
In step S123-1-8, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S123-1-1 is the RT3 gaming state. If it is determined that the player is in the RT3 gaming state (step S123-1-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9. If it is determined that the player is not in the RT3 gaming state ( Step S123-1-8 = No), the process proceeds to Step S123-1-10.

(Step S123-1-9)
In step S123-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT3 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S123-1-9 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-10)
In step S123-1-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S123-1-1 is the RT4 gaming state. If it is determined that the player is in the RT4 gaming state (step S123-1-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1231-11, and if it is determined that the player is not in the RT4 gaming state ( The process proceeds to Step S123-1-10 = No) and Step S123-1-12.

(Step S123-1-11)
In step S123-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S123-1-11 ends, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-12)
In step S123-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT5 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the processing of step S123-1-12 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(RT0 gaming state game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 64, the gaming state transition processing for RT0 gaming state performed by the processing of step S123-1-3 in FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT0 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-3-1)
In step S123-1-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on data stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S123-1-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-3-3, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S123-1-3-1 = No), the RT0 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-3-3)
In step S123-1-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S123-1-3-3 is completed, the RT0 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Game state transition process for RT1 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the gaming state transition process for RT1 gaming state performed by the process of step S123-1-5 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-5-1)
In step S123-1-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a preparation replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the preparation replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the preparation replay is displayed (step S123-1-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-5-2, and it is determined that the preparation replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S123-1-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-5-3.

(Step S123-1-5-2)
In step S123-1-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT2 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-5-2 is completed, the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-5-3)
In step S123-1-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the blue 7 replay or the follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed based on the value stored in the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed (step S123-1-5-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-5-4, and the blue 7 replay or follow is displayed. When it is determined that the replay is not displayed (step S123-1-5-3 = No), the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the gaming state transition processing proceeds to step S123-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S123-1-5-4)
In step S123-1-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-5-4 is completed, the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(RT2 gaming state game state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 66, the game state transition process for RT2 game state performed by the process of step S123-1-7 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT2 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-7-1)
In step S123-1-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S123-1-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In the case (step S123-1-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7-3.

(Step S123-1-7-2)
In step S123-1-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-7-2 is completed, the RT2 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-7-3)
In step S123-1-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay or follow replay is displayed based on the value stored in the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed (step S123-1-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7-4, and red is displayed. If it is determined that 7 replays, blue 7 replays or follow replays are not displayed (step S123-1-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7-5.

(Step S123-1-7-4)
In step S123-1-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S123-1-7-4 is completed, the RT2 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-7-5)
In step S123-1-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S123-1-7-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-7-6, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S123-1-7-5 = No), the RT2 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-7-6)
In step S123-1-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S123-1-7-6 is completed, the RT2 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Game state transition process for RT3 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 67, the gaming state transition processing for RT3 gaming state performed by the processing of step S123-1-9 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT3 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-9-1)
In step S123-1-9-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S123-1-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In the case (step S123-1-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9-3.

(Step S123-1-9-2)
In step S123-1-9-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S123-1-9-2 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process for RT3 gaming state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-9-3)
In step S123-1-9-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RT4 transition replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the RT4 transition replay is displayed (step S123-1-9-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9-4, and the RT4 transition replay is not displayed. Is determined (step S123-1-9-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9-5.

(Step S123-1-9-4)
In step S123-1-9-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT4 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT4 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-9-4 is completed, the subroutine of RT3 gaming state gaming state transition processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-9-5)
In step S123-1-9-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the RUSH replay has been displayed (step S123-1-9-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-9-6, and it is determined that the RUSH replay has not been displayed. If it is determined (step S123-1-9-5 = No), the RT3 gaming state game state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-9-6)
In step S123-1-9-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-9-6 is completed, the subroutine of RT3 gaming state gaming state transition processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of gaming state transition processing.

(Game state transition process for RT4 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 68, the gaming state transition processing for RT4 gaming state performed by the processing of step S123-1-11 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT4 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-1-1)
In step S123-1-11-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S123-1-11-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-11-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In the case (step S123-1-11-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-11-3.

(Step S123-1-11-2)
In step S123-1-11-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S123-1-11-2 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-11-3)
In step S123-1-11-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S123-1-11-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S123-1-11-4, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S123-1-11-3 = No), the RT4 gaming state game state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-11-4)
In step S123-1-11-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-11-4 is completed, the subroutine of RT4 gaming state gaming state transition processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of gaming state transition processing.

(RT5 gaming state game state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the gaming state transition processing for the RT5 gaming state performed by the processing of step S1231-1-12 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT5 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-12-1)
In step S123-1-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S123-1-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1231-1-12-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In the case (step S123-1-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S123-1-12-3.

(Step S123-1-12-2)
In step S123-1-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-12-2 is completed, the RT5 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S123-1-12-3)
In step S123-1-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a preparation replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the preparation replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the preparation replay is displayed (step S123-1-12-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1231-1-12-4, and it is determined that the preparation replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S123-1-12-3 = No), the RT5 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S123-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S123-1-12-4)
In step S123-1-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT2 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S123-1-12-4 is completed, the subroutine of RT5 gaming state gaming state transition processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S123-2 of gaming state transition processing.

(Rotation effect setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 70, the spinning effect setting process performed by the process of step S111-4 of FIG. 57 and the process of step S123-4 of FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the spinning effect setting process.

(Step S111-4-1)
In step S <b> 111-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for executing the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-2.

(Step S111-4-2)
In step S111-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect to be executed is the spinning effect 02. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect flag 02 flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the spinning effect to be executed is the spinning effect 02 (step S111-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3, and the spinning effect to be executed is determined. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not 02 (step S111-4-2 = No), the rotation effect setting processing subroutine is terminated.

(Step S111-4-3)
In step S111-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a temporary timer. Specifically, the operation of the start lever 10 is requested during the rotation effect 02, and the continuation of the rotation effect 02 is executed based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10. Therefore, the main CPU 301 continues the rotation effect 02 even when the start lever 10 is not operated for a predetermined time after the start lever 10 is requested during the rotation effect 02. Is performed, the temporary timer value is set in a temporary timer value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value of the temporary timer can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-4.

(Step S111-4-4)
In step S111-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start lever 10 has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. If it is determined that the start lever 10 has been operated (step S111-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-5, and it is determined that the start lever 10 has not been operated. In this case (step S111-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-6.

(Step S111-4-5)
In step S111-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the temporary timer set in the process of step S111-4-3 to “0”. Then, when the process of step S111-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-6.

(Step S111-4-6)
In step S111-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer has become “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 has become “0”. If it is determined that the value of the temporary timer has become “0” (step S111-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-7, and the value of the temporary timer is “0”. If it is determined that it is not (step S111-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-4, and step S111-4 is continued until the value of the temporary timer becomes “0”. -4 to step S111-4-6 are repeatedly executed.

(Step S111-4-7)
In step S <b> 111-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the turning effect 02-02 or the turning effect 02-03. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation effect 02-02 or the rotation effect 02-03 based on the value of the rotation effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. And when it determines with it being the rotation effect 02-02 or the rotation effect 02-03 (step S111-4-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-4-8, and a rotation effect If it is determined that it is not 02-02 or the reeling effect 02-03 (step S111-4-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-9.

(Step S111-4-8)
In step S111-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a rotating effect correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a control to rotate the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the reverse direction by performing a process of adding “7” to the data corresponding to the rotation direction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-9.

(Step S111-4-9)
In step S111-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the rotation effect command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect command to the sub-control board 400. Here, the spinning effect command is a command having information related to the type of the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S111-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-10.

(Step S111-4-10)
In step S111-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a timer value in the wait timer storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-11.

(Step S111-4-11)
In step S111-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a timer wait process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets a temporary timer value and performs a process of waiting until the temporary timer value becomes “0”. When the process of step S111-4-11 ends, the spinning effect setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Cylinder effect processing)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the spinning effect processing performed by the processing of step S111-4-1 in FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the spinning drum effect process.

(Step S111-4-1-1)
In step S111-4-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the spinning effect table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a spinning effect table (see FIG. 23). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-2.

(Step S111-4-1-2)
In step S111-4-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding a register value corresponding to the rotation effect table (see FIG. 23). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-3.

(Step S111-4-1-3)
In step S111-4-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring effect block data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects among the effect block table 1 to the effect block table 9 (see FIGS. 25 to 26) based on the register value updated by the process of step S111-4-1-2. Any one effect block table is acquired, and the process of acquiring the effect block data is performed based on the acquired effect block table and the register value. At this time, processing for setting the initial address of the selected effect block table is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-4.

(Step S111-4-1-4)
In step S111-4-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the effect block end flag storage area is “1”. And when it determines with it being the time of completion | finish of a rotation effect (step S111-4-1-4 = Yes), a rotation effect process is complete | finished and step S111-4-2 of a rotation effect setting process is completed. If it is determined that it is not at the end of the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-5.

(Step S111-4-1-5)
In step S111-4-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the production cylinder and the rotation direction. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting the production cylinder and the rotation direction based on the production block data updated by the process in step S111-4-1-3. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-6.

(Step S111-4-1-6)
In step S111-4-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not correction is being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the correction flag is ON based on the effect block data acquired in step S111-4-1-3. If it is determined that correction is being performed (step S111-4-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-7, and if it is determined that correction is not being performed. (Step S111-4-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to Step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-7)
In step S111-4-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs an effect press order acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 detected by the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8.

(Step S111-4-1-8)
In step S111-4-1-8, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction update process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the reel rotation direction by correction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-9)
In step S111-4-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value of the effect phase table defined in the effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-10.

(Step S111-4-1-10)
In step S111-4-1-10, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding register values corresponding to the effect block tables (see FIGS. 25 to 26). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-11.

(Step S111-4-1-11)
In step S111-4-1-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs an effect phase execution count acquisition process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the number of executions, a process for obtaining a correction flag, and the like based on the effect phase table 1 to the effect phase table 31 (see FIGS. 27 to 29). And if the process of step S111-4-1-11 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-12.

(Step S111-4-1-12)
In step S111-4-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter correction process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for correcting the pulse counter and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-13.

(Step S111-4-1-13)
In step S111-4-1-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the offset value of the spinning drum effect execution table defined in the effect phase table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-14.

(Step S111-4-1-14)
In step S111-4-1-14, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding register values corresponding to the effect phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15)
In step S111-4-1-15, the main CPU 301 performs excitation image setting processing to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pulse counter and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-16.

(Step S111-4-1-16)
In step S111-4-1-16, the main CPU 301 performs an excitation execution number confirmation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for exciting the motor phases of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-17.

(Step S111-4-1-17)
In step S111-4-1-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process related to the currently set effect phase data has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process related to the effect phase data acquired by the process of step S111-4-1-14 has ended. And when it determines with the process concerning production | presentation phase data having been complete | finished (step S111-4-1-17 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-4-1-18, and relates to production phase data. If it is determined that the process has not ended (step S111-4-1-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15.

(Step S111-4-1-18)
In step S111-4-1-18, the main CPU 301 performs effect phase execution frequency subtraction processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the effect phase execution number counter provided in the sub RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-19.

(Step S111-4-1-19)
In step S111-4-1-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of performance phase executions is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the effect phase execution number counter has become “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the effect phase execution number counter by the process of step S111-4-1-18. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the value of the production phase execution count counter is “0” (step S111-4-1-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-20. If it is determined that the value of the phase execution number counter is not “0” (step S111-4-1-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12.

(Step S111-4-1-20)
In step S111-4-1-20, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the phase group has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the processing related to the effect phase data specified in the selected effect phase table has been completed based on the value of the phase counter data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the phase group has ended (step S111-4-1-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-21, and it is determined that the phase group has not ended. If it is determined (step S111-4-1-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-21)
In step S111-4-1-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of moving to a block execution flag address. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift to the block execution flag address of the selected effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-3.

(Rotation direction update process)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the rotation direction update process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-8 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of rotation direction update processing.

(Step S111-4-1-8-1)
In step S111-4-1-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation direction is being corrected. Specifically, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the main CPU 301 determines the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4, and the operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player is the middle stop button 12, the right stop button. 13. In order to correct the rotation direction of the reel 17 when operated in the order of the left stop button 11, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4 is determined, and the stop button 11 by the player , 12 and 13 are processed to determine whether or not the operation order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11 has been operated. If it is determined that the rotation direction is being corrected (step S111-4-1-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-4, and the rotation direction is being corrected. If it is determined that it is not (step S111-4-1-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-2.

(Step S111-4-1-8-2)
In step S111-4-1-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of confirming the target reel for the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control for confirming the target reel for the spinning effect based on the selected effect block data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-3.

(Step S111-4-1-8-3)
In step S111-4-1-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation direction is being corrected. Specifically, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the main CPU 301 corrects the rotation direction of the reel 17 when the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4 is determined and the right stop button 13 is first operated by the player. Therefore, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, a process of determining whether or not the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4 is determined and the right stop button 13 is first operated by the player is performed. If it is determined that the rotational direction is being corrected (step S111-4-1-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-4, and the rotational direction is being corrected. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-8-3 = No), the rotation direction update process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9 of the turning effect process. .

(Step S111-4-1-8-4)
In step S111-4-1-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control to correct the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the spinning effect and update the correction result. And when the process of step 111-4-1-8-4 is complete | finished, a rotation direction update process is complete | finished and a process transfers to step S111-4-1-9 of a rotation effect production process.

(Direction phase execution count acquisition process)
Next, based on FIG. 73, description will be given of the effect phase execution count acquisition process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-1 of FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect phase execution frequency acquisition processing.

(Step S111-4-1-11-1)
In step S111-4-1-11-1, the main CPU 301 performs an execution times acquisition process. Specifically, main CPU301 performs the process which acquires the data corresponding to the frequency | count of execution from the production phase data acquired by the production phase table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-11-2.

(Step S111-4-1-11-2)
In step S <b> 111-4-11-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the execution count data is 2-byte data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the data related to the number of executions acquired in the process of step S111-4-1-11-1 is 2-byte data. If it is determined that the number of executions is 2-byte data (step S111-4-1-11-2 = Yes), the effect phase execution number acquisition process is terminated, and step S111 of the spinning effect process. If the processing is shifted to 4-1-12 and it is determined that the execution count is not 2-byte data (step S111-4-1-11-2 = No), step S111-4-1- The process proceeds to 11-3.

(Step S111-4-1-11-3)
In step S111-4-1-1-11-3, the main CPU 301 performs an execution number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of executions of 2 bytes from the rendering phase data defined in the rendering phase table. And if the process of step S111-4-1-11-3 is complete | finished, an effect phase execution frequency acquisition process will be complete | finished, and a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-12.

(Pulse counter correction processing)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the pulse counter correction process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-12 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 74 shows a subroutine of pulse counter correction processing.

(Step S111-4-1-12-1)
In step S111-4-1-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during pulse counter correction. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is necessary to correct the pulse power necessary for starting the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. If it is determined that the pulse counter is being corrected (step S111-4-1-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-2, and the pulse counter is being corrected. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-8.

(Step S111-4-1-12-2)
In step S111-4-1-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel for a spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring data corresponding to the movable reel among the effect block data defined in the effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-3.

(Step S111-4-1-12-3)
In step S111-4-1-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” in a loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value of the loop counter is defined to be equal to the number of reels 17 of the gaming machine 1, and in the present embodiment, “3” is set as the value of the loop counter. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-4)
In step S111-4-1-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value in the loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-5.

(Step S111-4-1-12-5)
In step S111-4-1-12-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S111-4-1-12-4. To determine whether or not the value of the loop counter storage area provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is “0” (step S111-4-1-12-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-8. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is not “0” (step S111-4-1-12-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-6.

(Step S111-4-1-12-6)
In step S111-4-1-12-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is a target reel of the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a logical product operation of the reel corresponding to the rotation effect set in the process of step S111-4-1-12-2 and the data corresponding to the loop counter, thereby performing the rotation. Processing is performed to determine whether or not the reel is a production target reel. If it is determined that the reel is the target reel for the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-12-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-7, where If it is determined that the reel is not the production target reel (step S111-4-1-12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-7)
In step S111-4-1-12-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for correcting the pulse counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the pulse counter corresponding to the stepping motor corresponding to the reel for the spinning effect when performing the process because the pulse counter is being corrected. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-8)
In step S111-4-1-12-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the phase counter data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the value of the phase counter data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to acquire the next effect phase data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-8 is completed, the pulse counter correction process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-13 of the spinning drum effect process.

(Excitation image setting processing)
Next, based on FIG. 75, the excitation image setting process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-15 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of excitation image setting processing.

(Step S111-4-1-15-1)
In step S111-4-1-15-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pulse counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a pulse counter in order to acquire data related to any pulse data among the positions (a) to (h) in the pulse data table (see FIG. 32). Do. And if the process of step S111-4-1-15-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-15-2.

(Step S111-4-1-15-2)
In step S <b> 111-4-15-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel for a spinning effect and a search reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining data relating to the movable reel among the currently set effect block data, and searches for one of the reels 17 as a search reel. Processing to set as a reel is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-3.

(Step S111-4-1-15-3)
In step S <b> 111-4-15-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is a subject for the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an AND operation on the data related to the search reel set by the processing in step S111-4-1-15-2 and the data related to the reel effect target reel. Then, a process for determining whether or not the reel effect target reel is performed. If it is determined that the reel is the target reel for the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-15-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-4, where If it is determined that the reel is not a production target reel (step S111-4-1-15-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-16.

(Step S111-4-1-15-4)
In step S111-4-1-15-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the added value of the pulse counter. Specifically, main CPU301 performs the process which sets the data corresponding to a rotation direction among rotation effect execution execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-5.

(Step S111-4-1-15-5)
In step S111-4-1-15-5, the main CPU 301 performs a production target reel rotation direction confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming data relating to the current rotation direction of the reel 17. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-6.

(Step S111-4-1-15-6)
In step S111-4-1-15-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to correct the rotation direction of the production target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the data corresponding to the rotation direction to the data confirmed in the rotation direction by the processing in step S111-4-15-15-5, and as a result, corrects the rotation direction of the production target reel. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. And when it determines with it being at the time of correction | amendment of the rotation direction of an effect object reel (step S111-4-1-15-6 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S111-4-1-15-7. If it is determined that the rotation direction of the production target reel is not corrected (step S111-4-1-15-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-8.

(Step S111-4-1-15-7)
In step S111-4-1-15-7, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data in the reverse direction when data in the forward direction is set as data related to the current rotation direction of the reel 17 during the spinning effect. Do. On the other hand, when the data relating to the reverse direction is set as the data relating to the current rotation direction of the reel 17 during the spinning effect, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the data relating to the forward direction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-8.

(Step S111-4-1-15-8)
In step S111-4-1-15-8, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the rotation direction of the reel 17 confirmed by the process in step S111-4-1-15-5 or the rotation direction corrected by the process in step S111-4-1-15-7. To update the excitation pulse counter. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-9.

(Step S111-4-1-15-9)
In step S111-4-1-15-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a four-phase OFF flag value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the four-phase OFF flag of the current spinning effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-10.

(Step S111-4-1-15-10)
In step S111-4-1-15-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the four-phase is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the data related to the four-phase OFF flag set by the process of step S111-4-1-15-9 is ON. If it is determined that the four-phase is OFF (step S111-4-1-15-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-11 and the four-phase is OFF. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-15-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15-11)
In step S111-4-1-15-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an excitation pattern when the four phases are OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse data when the four phases are OFF. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-12.

(Step S111-4-1-15-12)
In step S111-4-1-15-12, the main CPU 301 performs an offset value correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the offset value related to the spinning drum effect execution table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-13.

(Step S111-4-1-15-13)
In step S111-4-1-15-13, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding a register value related to the rotation effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-14.

(Step S111-4-1-15-14)
In step S111-4-1-15-14, the main CPU 301 performs output excitation pattern storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing an excitation pattern when the four phases are OFF. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15-15)
In step S111-4-1-15-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an output excitation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse data to be supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-16.

(Step S111-4-1-15-16)
In step S111-4-1-15-16, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the output excitation pattern of the current search reel by the processing of step S111-4-15-15-15, so the value of the pulse counter corresponding to the next search reel is set. Is set in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-17.

(Step S111-4-1-15-17)
In step S111-4-1-15-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse signal output data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting pulse signal output data based on the output excitation pattern set by the process of step S111-4-1-15-15. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-18.

(Step S111-4-1-15-18)
In step S111-4-1-15-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not pulse signal output data has been set for the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 of the reel 17. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S111-4-1-15-18 = Yes), the excitation image setting process is ended and step S111-4-1 of the spinning effect processing is performed. When the process is shifted to -16 and it is determined that the processing of all the reels is not completed (step S111-4-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-2. Transition.

(Excitation execution frequency confirmation process)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the excitation execution number confirmation process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-16 of FIG. 71 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the excitation execution number confirmation process.

(Step S111-4-1-16-1)
In step S111-4-1-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs excitation execution number setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of times of excitation holding based on the current spinning effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-16-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-16-2.

(Step S111-4-1-16-2)
In step S111-4-1-16-2, the main CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the excitation has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not excitation for the number of times of excitation holding set by the process of step S111-4-1-16-1 has been completed. If it is determined that the excitation has been completed (step S111-4-1-16-2 = Yes), the excitation execution number confirmation process is terminated, and step S111-4-1 in the spinning effect process. When the process is shifted to -17 and it is determined that the excitation has not been completed (step S111-4-1-16-2 = No), step S111-4- is continued until the excitation is completed. The processing of 1-16-2 is repeatedly executed.

(Timer wait processing)
Next, the timer waiting process performed by the process of step S111-4-10 of FIG. 70 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 77 shows a subroutine for timer waiting processing.

(Step S111-4-10-1)
In step S111-4-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the RAM 303 as the value of the temporary timer. Then, when the process of step S111-4-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-10-2.

(Step S111-4-10-2)
In step S111-4-10-2, the main CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer has become “0” as a result of the subtraction of the value of the temporary timer by an interrupt process (see FIG. 78) described later. . If it is determined that the value of the temporary timer is “0” (step S111-4-1-10-2 = Yes), the timer waiting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process. If it is determined that the value of the temporary timer is not “0” (step S111-4-10-2 = No), step S111-4-10 is performed until the value of the temporary timer becomes “0”. -2 is repeatedly executed.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”. FIG. 78 shows a subroutine for interrupt processing.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving signals from the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, and the power supply board 500 through the I / F circuit 305. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the spinning effect time at the time of the spinning effect, the minimum one game time, and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel number in order to set a target of a reel to be driven and controlled in a reel drive control process of step S205 described later. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the reel stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S204 via the reel control board 100, thereby accelerating the reel 17. Perform constant speed, deceleration control, etc. In addition, when executing the spinning effect, control is performed to rotate the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the reverse rotation direction. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S205 has been performed for all the reels of the reel 17. If it is determined that all reels have been completed (step S206 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S207. If it is determined that all reels have not been completed (step S206 = No), step S204 is performed. The process is repeated until the reel drive control process is performed on all reels.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of outputting the data set by the terminal board signal output process in step S123-2 to a terminal board (not shown). Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 23, BET lamps 24 a to 24 c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throw-in display lamp 28, and a re-game display lamp 29. Perform light emission control. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG. The main process in the sub control board is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 412 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 415 and initialization of the task system. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting a main board communication task. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of starting the main board communication task in order to execute the process of FIG. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting a sound control task. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of starting a sound control task in order to execute the process of FIG. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting a lamp control task. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of starting a lamp control task in order to execute the process of FIG. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting an image control task. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting an image control task in order to execute the processing in FIG. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for starting a mother task. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of starting a mother task in order to execute the process of FIG. Then, when the process of step S306 is finished, the main process in the sub control board is finished.

(Main board communication task)
Next, the main board communication task will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S401)
In step S401, the sub CPU 412 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for initializing a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S401 ends, the process proceeds to step S402.

(Step S402)
In step S402, the sub CPU 412 performs a received command check process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for the I / F circuit 411 to check a command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S402 ends, the process proceeds to step S403.

(Step S403)
In step S403, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the previously transmitted command as a result of performing the process of step S402. I do. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S403 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S404. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S403 = No), The process proceeds to step S402.

(Step S404)
In step S404, the sub CPU 412 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of creating game information from the command checked by the sub control board 400 in the process of step S402 and storing it in the sub RAM 415. By this processing, information included in the parameter of the command received by the I / F circuit 411 from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is stored in the sub RAM 415. Therefore, the main control board 300 is also included in the sub control board 400. Can manage information managed in. Then, when the process of step S404 ends, the process proceeds to step S405.

(Step S405)
In step S405, the sub CPU 412 performs command analysis processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing corresponding to the command received by the I / F circuit 411 from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405 ends, the process proceeds to step S402.

(Sound control task)
Next, the sound control task will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S501)
In step S501, the sub CPU 412 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for initializing data related to sound. Then, when the process of step S501 ends, the process proceeds to step S502.

(Step S502)
In step S502, the sub CPU 412 performs a lamp control task execution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of jumping to the lamp control task of FIG. Then, when the process of step S502 ends, the process proceeds to step S503.

(Step S503)
In step S503, the sub CPU 412 performs sound data analysis processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing when jumping from the image control task to the sound control task execution processing by the processing in step S652 in FIG. 83, and determines sound data in step S405-3 described later. The sound data determined by the process is analyzed. Then, when the process of step S503 ends, the process proceeds to step S504.

(Step S504)
In step S504, the sub CPU 412 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for controlling sound output from the speakers 34 and 35 based on the analysis result of the processing in step S503. Then, when the process of step S504 ends, the process proceeds to step S502.

(Ramp control task)
Next, the lamp control task will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S601)
In step S601, the sub CPU 412 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for initializing data related to the lamp. Then, when the process of step S601 ends, the process proceeds to step S602.

(Step S602)
In step S602, the sub CPU 412 performs image control task execution processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of jumping to the image control task in FIG. Then, when the process of step S602 ends, the process proceeds to step S603.

(Step S603)
In step S603, the sub CPU 412 performs lamp data analysis processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing when jumping from the sound control task to the lamp control task execution processing by the processing in step S502 of FIG. 81, and determines lamp data determination in step S405-2 described later. A process of analyzing the ramp data determined by the process is performed. Then, when the process of step S603 ends, the process proceeds to step S604.

(Step S604)
In step S604, the sub CPU 412 performs a lamp control process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of controlling the light emission of the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the analysis result of the process in step S603. Do. Then, when the process of step S604 ends, the process proceeds to step S602.

(Image control task)
Next, the image control task will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S651)
In step S651, the sub CPU 412 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for initializing data related to the image. Then, when the process of step S651 ends, the process proceeds to step S602.

(Step S652)
In step S652, the sub CPU 412 performs sound control task execution processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of jumping to the sound control task of FIG. Then, when the process of step S652 ends, the process proceeds to step S653.

(Step S653)
In step S653, the sub CPU 412 performs image data analysis processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing when jumping from the lamp control task to the execution processing of the image control task by the processing of step S602 in FIG. 82, and determines image data in step S405-4 described later. A process of analyzing the image data determined by the process is performed. Then, when the process of step S653 ends, the process proceeds to step S654.

(Step S654)
In step S654, the sub CPU 412 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of outputting a signal to the image control board 420 based on the analysis result of the process of step S653. Then, when the process of step S654 ends, the process proceeds to step S652.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S405-1)
In step S405-1, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect content determination process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 412 performs a process for acquiring the production contents. Then, when the process of step S405-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-2.

(Step S405-2)
In step S405-2, the sub CPU 412 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining lamp data corresponding to the effect content determined by the process of step S405-1. Then, when the process of step S405-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-3.

(Step S405-3)
In step S405-3, the sub CPU 412 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining sound data corresponding to the effect content determined by the process of step S405-1. Then, when the process of step S405-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-4.

(Step S405-4)
In step S405-4, the sub CPU 412 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining image data corresponding to the effect content determined by the process of step S405-1. Then, when the process of step S405-4 ends, the command analysis process ends, and the process proceeds to step S406 of the main board communication task.

(Production content determination process)
Next, the effect content determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect content determination processing.

(Step S405-1-1)
In step S405-1-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a power-on command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a power-on command. If it is determined that the received command is a power-on command (step S405-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-2, and the received command is not a power-on command. If it is determined (step S405-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-3.

(Step S405-1-2)
In step S405-1-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a power-on command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data at power-on based on a power-on command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-2 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-3)
In step S405-1-3, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether a setting change device operation start command or a setting change device operation end command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a setting change device operation start command or a setting change device operation end command. If it is determined that the received command is a setting change device operation start command or a setting change device operation end command (step S405-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-4. If it is determined that the received command is not a setting change device operation start command or a setting change device operation end command (step S405-1-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-5.

(Step S405-1-4)
In step S405-1-4, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for receiving a setting change device operation start / end command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data at the time of setting change based on the setting change device operation start / end command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. And if the process of step S405-1-4 is complete | finished, an effect content determination process will be complete | finished and a process will be transfered to step S405-2 of a command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-5)
In step S405-1-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a gaming state command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a gaming state command. If it is determined that the received command is a gaming state command (step S405-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-6, and the received command is not a gaming state command. If it is determined (step S405-1-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S4055-1-7.

(Step S405-1-6)
In step S405-1-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a game state command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the gaming state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the gaming state command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Moreover, the process which determines the production | presentation based on the information contained in a game state command is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-6 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-7)
In step S405-1-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not an automatic medal insertion command or a medal insertion command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a medal automatic insertion command or a medal insertion command. If it is determined that the received command is an automatic medal insertion command or a medal insertion command (step S405-1-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-8, and the received command is If it is determined that the command is not an automatic medal insertion command or a medal insertion command (step S405-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-9.

(Step S405-1-8)
In step S405-1-8, the sub CPU 412 performs processing upon reception of a medal insertion command. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the presentation data at the time of automatic medal insertion or medal insertion based on the automatic medal insertion command or medal insertion command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Etc. Then, when the process of step S405-1-8 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-9)
In step S405-1-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a reel rotation start acceptance command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a reel rotation start acceptance command. If it is determined that the received command is a reel rotation start acceptance command (step S405-1-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4055-1-10, and the received command is a reel rotation start command. If it is determined that the command is not a reception command (step S405-1-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-11.

(Step S405-1-10)
In step S405-1-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the reel rotation start acceptance command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-11)
In step S405-1-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a swivel effect command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a rotation effect command. If it is determined that the received command is a rotation effect command (step S405-1-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-12, and the received command is a rotation effect command. If it is determined that it is not (Step S405-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to Step S405-1-13.

(Step S405-1-12)
In step S405-1-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process for receiving a spinning effect command. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the spinning effect command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-12 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for selecting effect data at the time of the turning effect based on the received turning effect command. Specifically, the turning effect command has information relating to the turning effect flag 01 flag to the turning effect flag 04, and the sub CPU 412 includes the turning effect flag 01 flag to the turn effect flag included in the turning effect command. Processing for selecting effect data such as music data according to the information related to the trunk effect flag 04 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control to select specific music data when the spinning effect flag 03 flag is ON. Although specifically described later, the specific music data is linked to the movement of the reel 17 during the spinning effect.

(Step S405-1-13)
In step S405-1-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a reel rotation start command. If it is determined that the received command is a reel rotation start command (step S405-1-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-14, and the received command is a reel rotation start command. If it is determined that it is not (step S405-1-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S4055-1-15.

(Step S405-1-14)
In step S405-1-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a reel rotation start command reception process. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the reel rotation start command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. When the process of step S405-1-14 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-15)
In step S405-1-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a reel stop command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a reel stop command. If it is determined that the received command is a reel stop command (step S405-1-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16, and the received command is not a reel stop command. If it is determined (step S405-1-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-17.

(Step S405-1-16)
In step S405-1-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a reel stop command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data at the time of reel stop based on the reel stop command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-17)
In step S405-1-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a re-game operation command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a re-game operation command. If it is determined that the received command is a re-game operation command (step S405-1-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-18, and the received command is a re-game operation command. If it is determined that it is not (Step S405-1-17 = No), the process proceeds to Step S405-1-19.

(Step S405-1-18)
In step S405-1-18, the sub CPU 412 performs re-game operation command reception processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the re-game operation command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-18 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-19)
In step S405-1-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a medal payout start command or a medal payout end command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a medal payout start command or a medal payout end command. If it is determined that the received command is a medal payout start command or a medal payout end command (step S405-1-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-20, and the received command Is determined not to be a medal payout start command or a medal payout end command (step S405-1-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S4055-1-20.

(Step S405-1-20)
In step S405-1-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a medal payout start / end command reception process. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the medal payout start command or medal payout end command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-20 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-21)
In step S405-1-21, the sub CPU 412 performs processing according to the received command. In the processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining effect data based on the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S405-1-21 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when receiving power-on command)
Next, the power-on command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a subroutine of power-on command reception processing.

(Step S405-1-2-1)
In step S405-1-2-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag has been turned ON in a selection menu execution process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. More specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON based on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the reset prohibition flag is ON (step S405-1-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-2-2, and the reset prohibition flag is not ON. Is determined (step S405-1-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-2-2.

(Step S405-1-2-2)
In step S405-1-2-2, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the reset prohibition flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-2-2.

(Step S405-1-2-3)
In step S405-1-2-2-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-2-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-2-2-4.

(Step S405-1-2-4)
In step S405-1-2-2-4, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining the content of the effect when the power is turned on based on the effect determination table provided in the sub ROM 414. When the process of S405-1-2-2-4 is completed, the power-on command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when setting change device operation start / end command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 87, the setting change device operation start / end command reception process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing upon reception of a setting change device operation start / end command.

(Step S405-1-4-1)
In step S405-1-4-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag has been turned ON in a selection menu execution process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. More specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON based on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the reset prohibition flag is ON (step S405-1-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-4-2, and the reset prohibition flag is not ON. Is determined (step S405-1-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-4-3.

(Step S405-1-4-2)
In step S405-1-4-2, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the reset prohibition flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-4-2.

(Step S405-1-4-3)
In step S405-1-4-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-4-4.

(Step S405-1-4-4)
In step S405-1-4-4, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining the contents of effects at the time of receiving the setting change device operation start / end command based on the effect determination table provided in the sub ROM 414. When the process of S405-1-4-4 ends, the setting change device operation start / end command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control for prohibiting resetting the number of bonus preparation state transition games for 60 games based on the reception of the power-on command or the setting change device operation start / end command. Do. This makes it impossible to determine whether or not the setting value has been changed for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs control to prohibit resetting the number of bonus preparation state transition games for 60 games based on the reception of the power-on command or the setting change device operation start / end command. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect button 18 and the cross key 19 may be physically disabled.

(Reel rotation start acceptance command reception processing)
Next, the process at the time of receiving the reel rotation start acceptance command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a reel rotation start acceptance command.

(Step S405-1-10-1)
In step S405-1-10-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a bonus preparation state transition game number reset process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining again the number of Bonus preparation state transition games. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-2.

(Step S405-1-10-2)
In step S405-1-10-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “01” to “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01” to “03” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state numbers are “01” to “03” (step S405-1-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3, and the state number Is determined not to be “01” to “03” (step S405-1-10-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-4.

(Step S405-1-10-3)
In step S405-1-10-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a normal state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-3 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-4)
In step S405-1-10-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “04” to “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “04” to “05” based on the values stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state numbers are “04” to “05” (step S405-1-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5, and the state number Is determined not to be “04” to “05” (step S405-1-10-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-6.

(Step S405-1-10-5)
In step S405-1-10-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a precursor stage process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-5 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-6)
In step S405-1-10-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “06” to “07”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “06” to “07” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. When it is determined that the state numbers are “06” to “07” (step S405-1-10-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7, and the state number Is determined not to be “06” to “07” (step S405-1-10-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-8.

(Step S405-1-10-7)
In step S405-1-10-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing mode process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-7 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-8)
In step S405-1-10-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “08” to “10”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “08” to “10” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “08” to “10” (step S405-1-10-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9, and the state number Is determined not to be “08” to “10” (step S405-1-10-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-10.

(Step S405-1-10-9)
In step S405-1-10-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-9 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-10)
In step S405-1-10-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “11” to “13”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “11” to “13” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state numbers are “11” to “13” (step S405-1-10-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “11” to “13” (step S405-1-10-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-12.

(Step S405-1-10-11)
In step S405-1-10-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a processing for the Bonus state during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-11 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-12)
In step S405-1-10-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “14”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “14” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “14” (step S405-1-10-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13, and the state number is “14”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S405-1-10-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-14.

(Step S405-1-10-13)
In step S405-1-10-13, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-13 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-14)
In step S405-1-10-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “15” to “16”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “15” to “16” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “15” to “16” (step S405-1-10-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15, and the state number Is determined not to be “15” to “16” (step S405-1-10-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-16.

(Step S405-1-10-15)
In step S405-1-10-15, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-15 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-16)
In step S405-1-10-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “17” to “18”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “17” to “18” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “17” to “18” (step S405-1-10-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17, and the state number Is determined not to be “17” to “18” (step S405-1-10-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-18.

(Step S405-1-10-17)
In step S405-1-10-17, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-17 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S405-1-10-18)
In step S405-1-10-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “19” to “20”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “19” to “20” based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “19” to “20” (step S405-1-10-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “19” to “20” (step S405-1-10-18 = No), the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the command analysis process proceeds to step S405-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S405-1-10-19)
In step S405-1-10-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. When the process of step S405-1-10-19 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  When providing a state number other than the above state numbers “01” to “20”, if it is determined that the state number is not “19” to “20” (step S405-1-10-18 = No). ), Processing corresponding to the state number “21” may be performed.

(Bonus preparation state line game number reset processing)
Next, the Bonus preparation state line game number reset process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state line game number reset process.

(Step S405-1-10-1-1)
In step S405-1-10-1-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON based on the value stored in the reset prohibition flag storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the reset prohibition flag is ON (step S405-1-10-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-2, and the reset prohibition flag is set. If it is determined that is not ON (step S405-1-10-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-5.

(Step S405-1-10-1-2)
In step S405-1-10-1-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the reset prohibition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the reset prohibition game number counter stored in the reset prohibition game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-3.

(Step S405-1-10-1-3)
In step S405-1-10-1-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reset prohibition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the reset prohibition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415 by the process of step S405-1-10-2. To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the reset prohibition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-4. When it is determined that the value of the reset prohibition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-1-3 = No), the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process is terminated, and the reel The process proceeds to step S405-1-10-2 of the process at the time of receiving the rotation start acceptance command.

(Step S405-1-10-1-4)
In step S405-1-10-1-4, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the reset prohibition flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-10-1-4 ends, the bonus preparation state transition game number reset process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-2 of the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process. Transition.

(Step S405-1-10-1-5)
In step S405-1-10-1-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is ON. If it is determined that the Bonus ready state transition game number reset flag is ON (step S405-1-10-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-6. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag is not ON (step S405-1-10-1-5 = No), the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process is terminated and reel rotation starts. The process proceeds to step S405-1-10-2 in the reception command reception process.

(Step S405-1-10-1-6)
In step S405-1-10-1-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining the number of bonus preparation state transition games based on the reset bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 40) provided in the sub ROM 414. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7.

(Step S405-1-10-1-7)
In step S405-1-10-1-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a bonus preparation state transition game number storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of bonus preparation state transition games determined by the Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process in step S405-1-10-1-6 as the bonus preparation state provided in the sub RAM 415. A process of overwriting the transfer game count storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-8.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of overwriting the Bonus preparation state transfer game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 by the Bonus preparation state transfer game number storage process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Will never be done. For example, after clearing the Bonus preparation state transition game number storage area provided in the sub-RAM 415, the number of Bonus preparation state transition games determined by the Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process in Step S405-1-6-3. May be set in the Bonus preparation state transition game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415.

(Step S405-1-10-1-8)
In step S405-1-10-1-8, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-1-9.

(Step S405-1-10-1-9)
In step S405-1-10-1-9, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the reset cancellation permission flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the value of the reset cancellation permission flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-10-1-9 ends, the bonus preparation state transition game number reset process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-2 of the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process. Transition.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 determines again the number of Bonus ready state transition games based on the reception of the reel rotation start acceptance command having information that the operation of the start lever 10 has been operated. I do. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the reset cancellation permission flag based on the reception of the reel rotation start acceptance command having information that the start lever 10 has been operated. For this reason, until the start lever 10 is operated by the player, the re-determination of the number of bonus preparation state transition games can be canceled. Therefore, even after the player accidentally operates the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8, the redetermination of the number of bonus preparation state transition games can be canceled by operating the settlement button 9.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal state process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S405-1-10-3-1)
In step S405-1-10-3-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S405-1-10-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-2, and the state number is set. Is determined to be not “01” (step S405-1-10-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-13.

(Step S405-1-10-3-2)
In step S405-1-10-3-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-2.

(Step S405-1-10-3-3)
In step S405-1-10-3-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S405-1-10-3-2, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter becomes “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-4. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-3-3 = No), step S405-1-10-3- The processing is shifted to 7.

(Step S405-1-10-3-4)
In step S405-1-10-3-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-5.

(Step S405-1-10-3-5)
In step S405-1-10-3-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-6.

(Step S405-1-10-3-6)
In step S405-1-10-3-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

(Step S405-1-10-3-7)
In step S405-1-10-3-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing mode lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the self-releasing mode based on the self-releasing mode lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 414, information on the winning area, and the self-releasing mode lottery probability. A lottery to determine whether or not to do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the self-releasing mode lottery table is provided with a table for a high probability state and a table for a low probability state. The self-releasing mode lottery table defines lottery values when the winning areas “30” to “36” are determined as a result of the internal lottery process performed by the main CPU 301, and other winning areas are determined. The lottery value in the event of a failure is not specified. Therefore, when a winning area other than the winning areas “30” to “36” is determined, the self-releasing mode is not entered. However, the self-releasing mode lottery table is not limited to such a table, and the lottery value defined for the winning area can be set as appropriate.

(Step S405-1-10-3-8)
In step S405-1-10-3-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery for shifting to the self-releasing mode has been won by the process of step S405-1-10-3-7. And when it determines with having been won (step S405-1-10-3-8 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-3-9, and it was determined with not having been won. In that case (step S405-1-10-3-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-10.

(Step S405-1-10-3-9)
In step S405-1-10-3-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “06”. When the process of step S405-1-10-3-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

(Step S405-1-10-3-10)
In step S405-1-10-3-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing mode lottery probability transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 draws a lot based on the self-releasing mode lottery probability transition table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 414 and the current self-releasing mode lottery probability (high probability state or low probability state). If the lottery is won, control for shifting the self-releasing mode lottery probability is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-11.

(Step S405-1-10-3-11)
In step S405-1-10-3-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not to move to the precursor stage A. Here, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs lottery based on the precursor stage A transition lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 414 and the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter, A process of determining whether or not the lottery is won is performed. If it is determined to shift to the precursor stage A (step S405-1-10-3-11 = Yes), the process shifts to step S405-1-10-3-12 and shifts to the precursor stage A. If it is determined not to do so (step S405-1-10-3-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

  Here, the precursor stage A transition lottery table is a normal state before a predetermined number of games from the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state A determined based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39). The rate at which the stage is shifted to the precursor stage A is defined as high. Similarly, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39), within the range of the number of games that are defined with a high lottery value, from a certain number of games to a predetermined number of games, from a normal state to a precursor stage A. The rate of migration is highly regulated.

  When a lottery based on the precursor stage A transition lottery table is won, the number of games until the transition to the precursor stage A is set, and the sub CPU 412 transitions to the precursor stage A when the number of games is played. Control may be performed.

(Step S405-1-10-3-12)
In step S405-1-10-3-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “04” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “04”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

  In the process of step S405-1-10-3-12, the sub CPU 412 also performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the precursor stage A game number counter.

(Step S405-1-10-3-13)
In step S405-1-10-3-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a return lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs lottery based on a return lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 414 and a winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-14.

  Here, in this embodiment, the return lottery table defines lottery values when the winning areas “30” to “36” are determined as a result of the internal lottery process performed by the main CPU 301, and other winning lots are determined. The lottery value when the area is determined is not defined. Therefore, when a winning area other than the winning areas “30” to “36” is determined, the return lottery is not won. However, the return lottery table is not limited to such a table, and the lottery value defined for the winning area can be set as appropriate.

(Step S405-1-10-3-14)
In step S405-1-10-3-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the return lottery is won. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the return lottery has been won as a result of the return lottery process of step S405-1-10-3-13. If it is determined that the return lottery has been won (step S405-1-10-3-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-15, and the return lottery is won. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (step S405-1-10-3-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

(Step S405-1-10-3-15)
In step S405-1-10-3-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “02” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S405-1-10-3-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-16, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “02” (step S405-1-10-3-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-19.

(Step S405-1-10-3-16)
In step S405-1-10-3-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-17.

(Step S405-1-10-3-17)
In step S405-1-10-3-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-18.

(Step S405-1-10-3-18)
In step S405-1-10-3-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

(Step S405-1-10-3-19)
In step S405-1-10-3-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “14” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “14”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-20.

(Step S405-1-10-3-20)
In step S405-1-10-3-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART game number counter storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-3-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-3-21.

(Step S405-1-10-3-21)
In step S405-1-10-3-21, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 1 (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. When the process of step S405-1-10-3-21 ends, the normal state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Treatment for precursor stage)
Next, the precursor stage process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the precursor stage process.

(Step S405-1-10-5-1)
In step S405-1-10-5-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “04” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S405-1-10-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “04” (step S405-1-10-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-15.

(Step S405-1-10-5-2)
In step S405-1-10-5-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-3.

(Step S405-1-10-5-3)
In step S405-1-10-5-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S405-1-10-5-2, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-5-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-4. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-5-3 = No), step S405-1-10-5- The processing is shifted to 7.

(Step S405-1-10-5-4)
In step S405-1-10-5-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-5.

(Step S405-1-10-5-5)
In step S405-1-10-5-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-6.

(Step S405-1-10-5-6)
In step S405-1-10-5-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-7)
In step S405-1-10-5-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing mode lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the self-releasing mode based on the self-releasing mode lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 414, information on the winning area, and the self-releasing mode lottery probability. A lottery to determine whether or not to do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-8.

(Step S405-1-10-5-8)
In step S405-1-10-5-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery for shifting to the self-releasing mode has been won by the process of step S405-1-10-5-7. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-5-8 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-5-9, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-5-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-11.

(Step S405-1-10-5-9)
In step S405-1-10-5-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “05” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “05”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-10.

(Step S405-1-10-5-10)
In step S405-1-10-5-10, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for setting the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in a self-release mode latent game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-11)
In step S405-1-10-5-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing mode lottery probability transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 draws a lot based on the self-releasing mode lottery probability transition table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 414 and the current self-releasing mode lottery probability (high probability state or low probability state). If the lottery is won, control for shifting the self-releasing mode lottery probability is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-12.

(Step S405-1-10-5-12)
In step S405-1-10-5-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor stage A game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor stage A game number counter. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-13.

(Step S405-1-10-5-13)
In step S405-1-10-5-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor stage A game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the precursor stage A game number counter by the process of step S405-1-10-5-12, and as a result, the value of the precursor stage A game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the precursor stage A game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-5-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-14. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the precursor stage A game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-5-13 = No), step S405-1-10-5- The processing is shifted to 23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-14)
In step S405-1-10-5-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-15)
In step S405-1-10-5-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-16.

(Step S405-1-10-5-16)
In step S405-1-10-5-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of Step S405-1-10-5-15, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-5-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-17. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-5-16 = No), step S405-1-10-5- The processing is shifted to 20.

(Step S405-1-10-5-17)
In step S405-1-10-5-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-17 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-18.

(Step S405-1-10-5-18)
In step S405-1-10-5-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-18 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-19.

(Step S405-1-10-5-19)
In step S405-1-10-5-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-10-5-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-20)
In step S405-1-10-5-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-21.

(Step S405-1-10-5-21)
In step S405-1-10-5-21, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the self-releasing mode latent game number counter by the process of step S405-1-10-5-20, and as a result, the value of the self-releasing mode latent game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. When it is determined that the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-5-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-22. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-5-21 = No), step S405-1-10-5- The processing is shifted to 23.

(Step S405-1-10-5-22)
In step S405-1-10-5-22, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-5-23.

  In step S405-1-10-5-22, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games staying in the self-releasing mode from “10 games”, “20 games”, and “until the transition to the Bonus preparation state” by lottery. Control. When “10 games” and “20 games” are determined, the sub CPU 412 performs control to store the value in the self-release mode game number counter of the sub RAM 415. If “until the state moves to the Bonus preparation state” is determined, control is performed to turn on the value of the corresponding flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415.

(Step S405-1-10-5-23)
In step S405-1-10-5-23, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 1 (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-5-22 is completed, the precursor stage process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Self-releasing mode processing)
Next, the self-releasing mode process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the self-releasing mode processing.

(Step S405-1-10-7-1)
In step S405-1-10-7-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “06” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “06” (step S405-1-10-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “06” (step S405-1-10-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-10.

(Step S405-1-10-7-2)
In step S405-1-10-7-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-3.

(Step S405-1-10-7-3)
In step S405-1-10-7-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of Step S405-1-10-7-2. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-4. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-7-3 = No), step S405-1-10-7- The processing is shifted to 7.

(Step S405-1-10-7-4)
In step S405-1-10-7-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-5.

(Step S405-1-10-7-5)
In step S405-1-10-7-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-6.

(Step S405-1-10-7-6)
In step S405-1-10-7-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-7)
In step S405-1-10-7-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-8.

(Step S405-1-10-7-8)
In step S405-1-10-7-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the self-releasing mode latent game number counter by the process of step S405-1-10-7-7, so that the value of the self-releasing mode latent game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the self-release mode latent game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-7-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-9. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the self-releasing mode latent game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-7-8 = No), step S405-1-10-7- The processing is shifted to 22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-9)
In step S405-1-10-7-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

  In step S405-1-10-7-9, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games staying in the self-releasing mode from “10 games”, “20 games”, and “until the transition to the Bonus preparation state” by lottery. Control. When “10 games” and “20 games” are determined, the sub CPU 412 performs control to store the value in the self-release mode game number counter of the sub RAM 415. If “until the state moves to the Bonus preparation state” is determined, control is performed to turn on the value of the corresponding flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415.

(Step S405-1-10-7-10)
In step S405-1-10-7-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-11.

(Step S405-1-10-7-11)
In step S405-1-10-7-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of step S405-1-10-7-10, and as a result, the value of the bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-7-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-12. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-7-11 = No), step S405-1-10-7- The processing is shifted to 15.

(Step S405-1-10-7-12)
In step S405-1-10-7-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-13.

(Step S405-1-10-7-13)
In step S405-1-10-7-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-14.

(Step S405-1-10-7-14)
In step S405-1-10-7-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-14 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-15)
In step S405-1-10-7-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a self-releasing lottery based on a self-releasing lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 414 and a winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-16.

(Step S405-1-10-7-16)
In step S405-1-10-7-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the self-releasing lottery process has been won by the process of step S405-1-10-7-15. And when it determines with having been won (step S405-1-10-7-16 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-7-17, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-7-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-20.

(Step S405-1-10-7-17)
In step S405-1-10-7-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “19” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “19”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-18.

(Step S405-1-10-7-18)
In step S405-1-10-7-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the standby state is waiting for the Bonus state A, waiting for the Bonus state B, or waiting for the Bonus state C based on the Bonus state distribution table (see FIG. 42) provided in the sub ROM 414. A process for determining one of them is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-19.

(Step S405-1-10-7-19)
In step S405-1-10-7-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the Bonus operation area. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-20)
In step S405-1-10-7-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the self-releasing mode. Specifically, in the self-releasing mode, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the self-releasing mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. As a result of the subtraction, the value of the self-releasing mode game number counter is A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the self-releasing mode is ended (step S405-1-10-7-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-21, and the self-releasing is performed. If it is determined that the mode is not at the end (step S405-1-10-7-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-21)
In step S405-1-10-7-21, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-7-22.

(Step S405-1-10-7-22)
In step S405-1-10-7-22, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 1 (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-7-22 is completed, the self-releasing mode process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Bonus state processing)
Next, the processing for the Bonus state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus state process.

(Step S405-1-10-9-1)
In step S405-1-10-9-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “08”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “08” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “08” (step S405-1-10-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “08” (step S405-1-10-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-9.

(Step S405-1-10-9-2)
In step S405-1-10-9-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S405-1-10-9-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-6. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S405-1-10-9-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-3.

(Step S405-1-10-9-3)
In step S405-1-10-9-3, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 enters the ART game number determination state based on the Bonus state B ART lottery table (see FIG. 44) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to move. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-4.

(Step S405-1-10-9-4)
In step S405-1-10-9-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S405-1-10-9-3 is a win. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-9-4 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-9-5, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-9-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-5)
In step S405-1-10-9-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-6)
In step S405-1-10-9-6, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to add the number of navigation stocks based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Do the lottery. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-7.

(Step S405-1-10-9-7)
In step S405-1-10-9-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-9-6. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-9-7 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-9-8, and it determined with having not been won. In such a case (step S405-1-10-9-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-8)
In step S405-1-10-9-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-9)
In step S405-1-10-9-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “09”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “09” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “09” (step S405-1-10-9-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-10, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “08” (step S405-1-10-9-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-13.

(Step S405-1-10-9-10)
In step S405-1-10-9-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 adds the number of navigation stocks based on the Bonus state A ART lottery table (see FIG. 46) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-11.

(Step S405-1-10-9-11)
In step S405-1-10-9-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-9-10 is a win. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-9-11 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-9-12, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-9-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-12)
In step S405-1-10-9-12, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock number addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of navigation stocks won in the navigation stock number addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-9-10 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-13)
In step S405-1-10-9-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to add the number of navigation stocks based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Do the lottery. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-14.

(Step S405-1-10-9-14)
In step S405-1-10-9-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-9-13. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-9-14 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-9-15, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-9-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-15)
In step S405-1-10-9-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-16.

(Step S405-1-10-9-16)
In step S405-1-10-9-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-17.

(Step S405-1-10-9-17)
In step S405-1-10-9-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415 has become “0” as a result of performing the processing of step S405-1-10-9-16. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-9-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-18. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-9-17 = No), step S405-1-10-9 is performed. The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S405-1-10-9-18)
In step S405-1-10-9-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S405-1-10-9-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-20. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S405-1-10-9-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-19.

(Step S405-1-10-9-19)
In step S405-1-10-9-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “02” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “02”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-23.

(Step S405-1-10-9-20)
In step S405-1-10-9-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “10”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “10” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “10” (step S405-1-10-9-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-21, and the state number Is determined not to be “10” (step S405-1-10-9-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-22.

(Step S405-1-10-9-21)
In step S405-1-10-9-21, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “16” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “16”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-23.

(Step S405-1-10-9-22)
In step S405-1-10-9-22, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “15” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “15”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-9-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-9-23.

(Step S405-1-10-9-23)
In step S405-1-10-9-23, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 2 (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. When the process of step S405-1-10-9-23 ends, the bonus state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Process for Bonus status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 94, processing for the Bonus state during ART will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the Bonus state during ART.

(Step S405-1-10-11-1)
In step S405-1-10-11-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “11”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “11” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “11” (step S405-1-10-11-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “11” (step S405-1-10-11-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-9.

(Step S405-1-10-11-2)
In step S405-1-10-11-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S405-1-10-11-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-6, When it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S405-1-10-11-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-3.

(Step S405-1-10-11-3)
In step S405-1-10-11-3, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number addition state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 puts the number of ART games on the basis of the Bonus state B ART lottery table (see FIG. 44) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to move. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-4.

(Step S405-1-10-11-4)
In step S405-1-10-11-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is obtained as a result of the ART game number addition state transition lottery in step S405-1-10-11-3. And when it determines with having been won (step S405-1-10-11-4 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-11-5, and it was determined with not having been won. In that case (step S405-1-10-11-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-5)
In step S405-1-10-11-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-6)
In step S405-1-10-11-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to add the number of navigation stocks based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Do the lottery. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-7.

(Step S405-1-10-11-7)
In step S405-1-10-11-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-11-6 is a win. And when it determines with having been won (step S405-1-10-11-7 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-11-8, and it was determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-11-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-8)
In step S405-1-10-11-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-9)
In step S405-1-10-11-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “12”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “12” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “12” (step S405-1-10-11-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-10, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “12” (step S405-1-10-11-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-13.

(Step S405-1-10-11-10)
In step S405-1-10-11-10, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 adds the number of navigation stocks based on the Bonus state A ART lottery table (see FIG. 46) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-10 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-11.

(Step S405-1-10-11-11)
In step S405-1-10-11-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-11-10. And when it determines with having been won (step S405-1-10-11-11 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-11-12, and it was determined with not having been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-11-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-12)
In step S405-1-10-11-12, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock number addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of navigation stocks selected by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S405-1-10-11-10 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-13)
In step S405-1-10-11-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not to add the number of navigation stocks based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Do the lottery. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-14.

(Step S405-1-10-11-14)
In step S405-1-10-11-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S405-1-10-11-13 is a win. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-11-14 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-11-15, and it determined with having not been won. In that case (step S405-1-10-11-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-15)
In step S405-1-10-11-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-16.

(Step S405-1-10-11-16)
In Step S405-1-10-11-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus game number counter during ART. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-16 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-17.

(Step S405-1-10-11-17)
In step S405-1-10-11-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the during-art bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415 has become “0” as a result of performing the processing of step S405-1-10-11-16. Processing to determine is performed. When it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-11-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-18. , And when it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-11-17 = No), step S405-1-10-11 The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S405-1-10-11-18)
In step S405-1-10-11-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S405-1-10-11-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-20, When it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S405-1-10-11-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-19.

(Step S405-1-10-11-19)
In step S405-1-10-11-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “14” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “14”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-23.

(Step S405-1-10-11-20)
In step S405-1-10-11-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “13”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “13” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “13” (step S405-1-10-11-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-21, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “13” (step S405-1-10-11-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-22.

(Step S405-1-10-11-21)
In step S405-1-10-11-21, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “18” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “18”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-21 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-23.

(Step S405-1-10-11-22)
In step S405-1-10-11-22, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “17” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “17”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-11-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-11-23.

(Step S405-1-10-11-23)
In step S405-1-10-11-23, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 2 (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. When the process of step S405-1-10-11-23 ends, the bonus state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(ART game processing)
Next, the ART game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a subroutine for ART game processing.

(Step S405-1-10-13-1)
In step S405-1-10-13-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-2.

(Step S405-1-10-13-2)
In step S405-1-10-13-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter has become “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART game number counter by the process of step S405-1-10-13-1, and as a result, the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-13-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-3. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-13-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-4. .

(Step S405-1-10-13-3)
In step S405-1-10-13-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-10.

(Step S405-1-10-13-4)
In step S405-1-10-13-4, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 draws an ART game number on the basis of an ART game number addition lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 414 and a winning area determined by the internal lottery process. I do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-5.

  In the ART game number addition lottery table, the ART game number additional game number and a lottery value corresponding to the additional game number are defined for each winning area. Here, in the internal lottery process, a winning area with a low probability of being determined as a winning area has a higher probability of being added as compared to a winning area with a high probability of being determined as a winning area, and the number of additional games There is a high probability that a large value will be selected. However, the lottery value in the lottery table added to the number of ART games is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

(Step S405-1-10-13-5)
In step S405-1-10-13-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of ART games in step S405-1-10-13-4. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-13-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-13-6, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-13-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-7.

(Step S405-1-10-13-6)
In step S405-1-10-13-6, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of added ART games selected in step S405-1-10-13-4 to the value of the ART game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-10.

(Step S405-1-10-13-7)
In step S405-1-10-13-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-8.

(Step S405-1-10-13-8)
In step S405-1-10-13-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S405-1-10-13-7, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. When it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S405-1-10-13-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-9. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S405-1-10-13-8 = No), step S405-1-10-13- The processing is shifted to 10.

(Step S405-1-10-13-9)
In step S405-1-10-13-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “20” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “20”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-13-10.

(Step S405-1-10-13-10)
In step S405-1-10-13-10, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 3 (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-13-10 ends, the ART state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(ART game number determination state processing)
Next, the ART game number determination state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S405-1-10-15-1)
In step S405-1-10-15-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning area is any of “04” to “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines that the information regarding the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is any one of “04” to “06”. Processing to determine whether or not there is is performed. If it is determined that the winning area is any of “04” to “06” (step S405-1-10-15-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the winning area is not “04” to “06” (step S405-1-10-15-1 = No), step S405-1-10-15- The processing is shifted to 4.

(Step S405-1-10-15-2)
In step S405-1-10-15-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. And when it determines with the number of navigation stock being "1" or more (step S405-1-10-15-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S405-1-10-15-3, When it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S405-1-10-15-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-7.

(Step S405-1-10-15-3)
In step S405-1-10-15-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the navigation stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-15-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-4.

(Step S405-1-10-15-4)
In step S405-1-10-15-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of navigation stocks based on the ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table (see FIG. 46) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery to determine whether or not to add. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-15-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-5.

(Step S405-1-10-15-5)
In step S405-1-10-15-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stock in step S405-1-10-15-4 is a win. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-15-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-15-6, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-15-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-7.

(Step S405-1-10-15-6)
In step S405-1-10-15-6, the sub CPU 412 performs navigation stock number addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of navigation stocks won by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S405-1-10-15-4 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-15-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-15-7.

(Step S405-1-10-15-7)
In step S405-1-10-15-7, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 3 (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-15-7 ends, the ART game number determination state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  In the ART game number determination state process, when the value of the navigation stock storage area is “1” or more and the winning area is “04” to “06”, the sub CPU 412 displays the symbol related to the BAR replay. Control which determines the production | presentation which alert | reports the stop operation order of the stop button 11,12,13 which displays a combination on an active line by the stop operation order display lamp 30 is performed.

(Process for adding the number of ART games)
Next, the processing for adding the number of ART games will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for adding the number of ART games.

(Step S405-1-10-17-1)
In step S405-1-10-17-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning area is any of “04” to “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines that the information regarding the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is any one of “04” to “06”. Processing to determine whether or not there is is performed. If it is determined that the winning area is any of “04” to “06” (step S405-1-10-17-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the winning area is not any of “04” to “06” (step S405-1-10-17-1 = No), step S405-1-10-17- The processing is shifted to 4.

(Step S405-1-10-17-2)
In step S405-1-10-17-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S405-1-10-17-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-3, When it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S405-1-10-17-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-7.

(Step S405-1-10-17-3)
In step S405-1-10-17-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the navigation stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-17-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-4.

(Step S405-1-10-17-4)
In step S405-1-10-17-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of navigation stocks based on the ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table (see FIG. 48) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery to determine whether or not to add. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-17-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-5.

(Step S405-1-10-17-5)
In step S405-1-10-17-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stock in step S405-1-10-17-4 is a win. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-17-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-17-6, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S405-1-10-17-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-7.

(Step S405-1-10-17-6)
In step S405-1-10-17-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a navigation stock number addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of navigation stocks won by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S405-1-10-17-4 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Do. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-17-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-17-7.

(Step S405-1-10-17-7)
In step S405-1-10-17-7, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 3 (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-17-7 ends, the ART game number addition state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  It should be noted that in the processing for adding the number of ART games, when the value of the navigation stock storage area is “1” or more and the winning area is “04” to “06”, the sub CPU 412 displays the symbol related to the BAR replay. Control which determines the production | presentation which alert | reports the stop operation order of the stop button 11,12,13 which displays a combination on an active line by the stop operation order display lamp 30 is performed.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, the Bonus preparation state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S405-1-10-19-1)
In step S405-1-10-19-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning area is any of “01” to “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is any one of “01” to “03”. Processing to determine whether or not there is is performed. If it is determined that the winning area is any of “01” to “03” (step S405-1-10-19-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the winning area is not any of “01” to “03” (step S405-1-10-19-1 = No), step S405-1-10-19- The processing is shifted to 3.

(Step S405-1-10-19-2)
In step S405-1-10-19-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the navigation stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus operation area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-3)
In step S405-1-10-19-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the standby state A is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state A based on the value of the Bonus state waiting storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state is waiting for the Bonus state A (Step S405-1-10-19-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S405-1-10-19-4, and the Bonus state A is performed. If it is determined that it is not waiting (step S405-1-10-19-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-7.

(Step S405-1-10-19-4)
In step S405-1-10-19-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 43A) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-5.

(Step S405-1-10-19-5)
In step S405-1-10-19-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S405-1-10-19-4. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-19-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-19-6, and it determined with having not been won. In such a case (step S405-1-10-19-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-6)
In step S405-1-10-19-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state standby update process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 412 has been promoted to the standby state B standby during the process of step S405-1-10-19-4, the value of the storage state standby storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is set. Update processing is performed while waiting for the Bonus state B. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 412 is promoted to the standby state C standby by the processing of step S405-1-10-19-4, the value of the bonus state standby storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is set to the bonus state C. Updates while waiting. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-7)
In step S405-1-10-19-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus state B is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus state B standby is based on the value of the Bonus state standby storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. And when it determines with it being in the Bonus state B standby (step S405-1-10-19-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S405-1-10-19-8, and the Bonus state B If it is determined that it is not waiting (step S405-1-10-19-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-8)
In step S405-1-10-19-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 43B) stored in the sub ROM 414 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-9.

(Step S405-1-10-19-9)
In step S405-1-10-19-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S405-1-10-19-4. And when it determines with having won (step S405-1-10-19-9 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S405-1-10-19-10, and it determined with having not been won. In such a case (step S405-1-10-19-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-10)
In step S405-1-10-19-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus state standby update process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 412 is promoted to the standby state C standby during the processing of step S405-1-10-19-8, the value of the storage state standby storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is set. Update processing is performed while waiting for the Bonus state C. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-10-19-11.

(Step S405-1-10-19-11)
In step S405-1-10-19-11, the sub CPU 412 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 includes an effect determination table 3 (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 414, a winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Based on the value or the like, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-10-19-11 ends, the bonus preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

  In the Bonus preparation state process, when the value of the Bonus operation area is “1” or more and the winning area is “01” to “03”, the sub CPU 412 waits for the Bonus state A and the Bonus state B Control is performed to determine an effect in which the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 is notified by the stop operation order display lamp 30 depending on either the standby state or the standby state C standby.

(Reel stop command reception processing)
Next, the reel stop command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel stop command reception processing.

(Step S405-1-16-1)
In step S405-1-16-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the third stop time. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation of the reel 17 is at the third stop based on the information stored in the sub RAM 415 by the process of step S304. If it is determined that it is the third stop time (step S405-1-16-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4055-1-16-2, and it is determined that it is not the third stop time. If it is determined (step S405-1-16-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-2)
In step S405-1-16-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed (step S4055-1-16-2 = YES), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3, and red is displayed. When it is determined that 7 replay, blue 7 replay, and follow replay are not displayed (step S405-1-16-2 = NO), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-4.

(Step S405-1-16-3)
In step S405-1-16-3, the sub CPU 412 performs red / blue 7 / follow replay display processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-4)
In step S405-1-16-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a BAR replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to BAR replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the BAR replay is displayed (step S405-1-16-4 = YES), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-5, and it is determined that the BAR replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S405-1-16-4 = NO), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-6.

(Step S405-1-16-5)
In step S405-1-16-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a BAR replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-6)
In step S405-1-16-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to RUSH replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S405-1-16-6 = YES), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-7, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If so (step S405-1-16-6 = NO), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-8.

(Step S405-1-16-7)
In step S405-1-16-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a RUSH replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-8)
In step S405-1-16-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S405-1-16-8 = YES), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-9, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S405-1-16-8 = NO), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-9)
In step S405-1-16-9, the sub CPU 412 performs blank display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-10)
In step S405-1-16-10, the sub CPU 412 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining an effect based on the effect determined when the reel rotation start acceptance command is received, the stop operation position of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13, the stop operation order, and the like. Do. When the process of step S405-1-16-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-2 of the command analysis process.

(Red 7 / Blue 7 / Follow replay display process)
Next, based on FIG. 100, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process will be described. Note that FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a subroutine of processing for displaying red 7, blue 7, and follow replay.

(Step S405-1-16-3-1)
In step S405-1-16-3-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “20”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “20” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “20” (step S405-1-16-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-2, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “20” (step S405-1-16-3-1 = No), the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the reel stop command reception process is completed. The process proceeds to S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-3-2)
In step S405-1-16-3-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is in progress. If it is determined that the ART is being performed (step S405-1-16-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-13, and it is determined that the ART is not being performed. If (step S405-1-16-3-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-3.

(Step S405-1-16-3-3)
In step S405-1-16-3-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus state B is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state B based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. And when it determines with it being in the Bonus state B standby (step S405-1-16-3-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S405-1-16-3-4, and the Bonus state B If it is determined that it is not waiting (step S405-1-16-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-6.

(Step S405-1-16-3-4)
In step S405-1-16-3-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “08” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “08”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-5.

(Step S405-1-16-3-5)
In step S405-1-16-3-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-3-5 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Step S405-1-16-3-6)
In step S405-1-16-3-6, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the standby state A is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state A based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state is waiting for the Bonus state A (Step S405-1-16-3-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S405-1-16-3-7, and the Bonus state A is performed. If it is determined not to be on standby (step S405-1-16-3-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-9.

(Step S405-1-16-3-7)
In step S405-1-16-3-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “09” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “09”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-8.

(Step S405-1-16-3-8)
In step S405-1-16-3-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-3-8 ends, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Step S405-1-16-3-9)
In step S405-1-16-3-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus state C is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state C based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state is waiting for the Bonus state C (step S405-1-16-3-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-10, and the Bonus state B If it is determined that it is not waiting (step S405-1-16-3-9 = No), the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display time processing is ended, and the reel stop command reception time processing step S405 is completed. The process proceeds to 1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-3-10)
In step S405-1-16-3-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “10” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “10”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-11.

(Step S405-1-16-3-11)
In step S405-1-16-3-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-12.

(Step S405-1-10-3-12)
In step S405-1-10-3-12, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-10-3-12 ends, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display time process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Step S405-1-16-3-13)
In step S405-1-16-3-13, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the standby state B is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state B based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. And when it determines with it being in the Bonus state B standby (step S405-1-16-3-13 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S405-1-16-3-14, and the Bonus state B If it is determined not to be on standby (step S405-1-16-3-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-16.

(Step S405-1-16-3-14)
In step S405-1-16-3-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “11” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “11”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-15.

(Step S405-1-16-3-15)
In step S405-1-16-3-15, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-3-15 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Step S405-1-16-3-16)
In step S405-1-16-3-16, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the standby state A is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state A based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state is waiting for the Bonus state A (Step S405-1-16-3-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to Step S405-1-16-3-17, and the Bonus state A is performed. If it is determined not to be on standby (step S405-1-16-3-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-19.

(Step S405-1-16-3-17)
In step S405-1-16-3-17, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “12” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “12”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-18.

(Step S405-1-16-3-18)
In step S405-1-16-3-18, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-3-18 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Step S405-1-16-3-19)
In step S405-1-16-3-19, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus state C is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting for the Bonus state C based on the value stored in the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state is waiting for the Bonus state C (step S405-1-16-3-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-20, and the Bonus state B If it is determined that it is not waiting (step S405-1-16-3-19 = No), the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and the reel stop command reception processing step S405 is completed. The process proceeds to 1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-3-20)
In step S405-1-16-3-20, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “13” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “13”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-21.

(Step S405-1-16-3-21)
In step S405-1-16-3-21, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-3-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-3-22.

(Step S405-1-16-3-22)
In step S405-1-16-3-22, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” as the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-3-22 ends, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process. To migrate.

(Process during BAR replay display)
Next, the BAR replay display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during BAR replay display.

(Step S405-1-16-5-1)
In step S405-1-16-5-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is any one of “15” to “18”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether any of status numbers “15” to “18” is stored in the status number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is any one of “15” to “18” (step S405-1-16-5-1 = Yes), the process goes to step S405-1-16-5-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the state number is not “15” to “18” (step S405-1-16-5-1 = No), the BAR replay display time process is terminated, The processing shifts to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception processing.

(Step S405-1-16-5-2)
In step S405-1-16-5-2, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the combination of symbols related to the BAR replay based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 47) provided in the sub ROM 414 and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line. A process of determining the number of ART games to be added when displayed on the active line is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-5-3.

(Step S405-1-16-5-3)
In step S405-1-16-5-3, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART game number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adding the number of ART games determined by the process of step S405-1-16-5-2 to the ART game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S405-1-16-5-3 is completed, the BAR replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process.

(RUSH replay display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 102, the RUSH replay display process will be described. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the RUSH replay display process.

(Step S405-1-16-7-1)
In step S405-1-16-7-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is any one of “15” to “18”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether any of status numbers “15” to “18” is stored in the status number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is any one of “15” to “18” (step S405-1-16-7-1 = Yes), the process goes to step S405-1-16-7-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the state number is not any of “15” to “18” (step S405-1-16-7-1 = No), the RUSH replay display time process is terminated, The processing shifts to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception processing.

(Step S405-1-16-7-2)
In step S405-1-16-7-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “14” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “14”. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-7-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-7-3.

(Step S405-1-16-7-3)
In step S405-1-16-7-3, the sub CPU 412 performs an ART Bonus preparation state transition game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 30) provided in the sub ROM 414, and the Bonus of the sub RAM 415. Processing to store in the ready state transition game number counter is performed. When the process of step S405-1-16-7-3 is completed, the RUSH replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process.

(Blank display processing)
Next, the blank display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 shows a subroutine for blank display processing.

(Step S405-1-16-9-1)
In step S405-1-16-9-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02” or “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” or “03” is stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the state number is “02” or “03” (step S405-1-10-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-9-2. If it is determined that the status number is not “02” or “03” (step S405-1-16-9-1 = No), the blank display process is terminated and the reel stop command reception process is completed. The process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10.

(Step S405-1-16-9-2)
In step S405-1-16-9-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) provided in the sub ROM 414, and A process of storing in the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S405-1-16-9-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-9-3.

  If a value has already been stored in the Bonus ready state transition game number counter of the sub RAM 415 by the process of step S405-1-16-7-3, step S405-1-16-9-2 is executed. It is not necessary to execute the process. As a result, even if the ART game has continued for a long time, even if it does not shift to the Bonus state, the ART game is compared with the case where the process of step S405-1-16-9-2 is executed. There are cases where the number of games until the transition to the Bonus state after the completion can be shortened.

(Step S405-1-16-9-3)
In step S405-1-16-9-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 to “01”. When the process of step S405-1-16-9-3 ends, the blank display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S405-1-16-10 of the reel stop command reception process.

(Mother task)
Next, the mother task will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S307-1)
In step S307-1, the sub CPU 412 performs initialization processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for initializing a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-2.

(Step S307-2)
In step S <b> 307-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not it is after receiving a medal payout end command or all reel stop commands until receiving a medal automatic insertion command or a medal insertion command. And when it determines with it being waiting (step S307-2 = Yes), a process is transfered to step S307-3. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not waiting (step S307-2 = No), the process according to step S307-2 is repeatedly performed until it is waiting.

(Step S307-3)
In step S307-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the effect button 18 is detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect button detection switch 18sw has detected an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. And when it determines with operation of the production button 18 having been detected (step S307-3 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S307-4, and it determined with operation of the production button 18 not being detected. In that case (step S307-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S307-2.

(Step S307-4)
In step S307-4, the sub CPU 412 performs menu screen display processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for setting a command for displaying a menu screen in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-5.

  Here, the menu screen displayed in this embodiment differs depending on the value of the reset cancellation permission flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Specifically, when the value of the reset cancellation permission flag is ON, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for setting a command for displaying a menu screen shown in FIG. 113D described later in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415. When the value of the reset cancellation permission flag is OFF, processing for setting a command for displaying a menu screen of FIG. 112A or a menu screen of FIG. 115G described later in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415 is performed. . As a result, when the value of the reset cancellation permission flag is ON, a menu screen shown in FIG. 113D described later is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and when the value of the reset cancellation permission flag is OFF, A menu screen shown in FIG. 112 (a) or a menu screen shown in FIG. 115 (g) described later is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

(Step S307-5)
In step S307-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation of the cross key 19 is detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the cross key detection switch 19sw has detected an operation of the cross key 19 by the player. If it is determined that the operation of the cross key 19 is detected (step S307-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-6, and it is determined that the operation of the cross key 19 is not detected. In that case (step S307-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S307-7.

(Step S307-6)
In step S307-6, the sub CPU 412 performs cursor movement processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 sets a command for moving and displaying the cursor displayed on the menu screen in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415 based on the key corresponding to the direction in which the operation is detected among the cross keys 19. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S307-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-7.

(Step S307-7)
In step S307-7, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the effect button 18 is detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect button detection switch 18sw has detected an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. If it is determined that the operation of the effect button 18 is detected (step S307-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-8, and it is determined that the operation of the effect button 18 is not detected. In this case (step S307-7 = No), the process according to step S307-7 is repeated until the operation of the effect button 18 is detected.

(Step S307-8)
In step S307-8, the sub CPU 412 performs a selection menu determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 determines a menu to be selected based on the current cursor position among the menus displayed on the menu screen, and stores information related to the determined menu in the selection menu of the sub RAM 415. Processing to store in the storage area is performed. Further, based on the current cursor position, a process of setting a command for displaying that the menu to be selected has been determined is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9.

(Step S307-9)
In step S307-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a selection menu execution process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 412 performs a process corresponding to the information stored in the sub RAM 415 in the process of step S308-8. Then, when the process of step S307-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-2.

  If the operation of the effect button 18 is not detected in the process of step S307-7 (step S307-7 = No), the process of step S307-7 is repeatedly executed until the operation of the effect button 18 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the 1BET switch 7sw detects the operation of the 1BET button 7, or when the MAX-BET switch 8sw detects the operation of the MAX-BET button 8, a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6. In the case where it is no longer in standby, for example, the process may be shifted to step S307-2. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 despite the game being started.

  In the present embodiment, the menu displayed at the cursor is notified of the menu displayed at the cursor by changing the color of the menu displayed at the cursor with the menu not displayed at the cursor. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can be selected as appropriate. For example, an arrow image or a vertical bar image may be displayed beside the menu displayed with the cursor, or an animation image such as a hand shape may be displayed beside the menu displayed with the cursor. It is also conceivable to flash the menu displayed at the cursor.

(Selection menu execution process)
Next, the selection menu execution process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a subroutine of selection menu execution processing.

(Step S307-9-1)
In step S307-9-1, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a history recording game has been selected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not a history recording game is selected based on information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the history recording game has been selected (step S308-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-9-2, and it is determined that the history recording game has not been selected. In the case (step S307-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S307-9-3.

  The history recording game refers to a game in which the game machine 1 is input with the player's unique information and the game machine 1 stores the game history information.

(Step S307-9-2)
In step S307-9-2, the sub CPU 412 performs a history recording game selection process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 uses a two-dimensional code to store information related to the game history based on the process of inputting the player's unique information to the gaming machine 1 and the player's unique information input to the gaming machine 1. The process etc. which are output in are performed. When the process of step S307-9-2 ends, the selection menu execution process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S307-2 of the mother task.

(Step S307-9-3)
In step S307-9-3, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not a reset is selected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not reset is selected based on information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that reset has been selected (step S307-9-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-9-4, and if it is determined that reset has not been selected ( Step S307-9-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S307-9-10.

(Step S307-9-4)
In step S307-9-4, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not the reset prohibition flag is ON based on the value stored in the reset prohibition flag storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that the reset prohibition flag is ON (step S307-9-4 = Yes), the selection menu execution process ends, the process proceeds to step S307-2 of the mother task, and the reset prohibition is performed. If it is determined that the flag is not ON (step S307-9-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S307-9-5.

(Step S307-9-5)
In step S307-9-5, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number backup process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 copies the value of the number of bonus ready state transition games stored in the bonus ready state transition game number storage area to the number of bonus ready state transition game number backup areas provided in the sub RAM 415. Process. Then, when the process of step S307-9-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-6.

(Step S307-9-6)
In step S307-9-6, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-7.

(Step S307-9-7)
In step S307-9-7, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the reset cancellation permission flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the reset cancellation permission flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-9-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-8.

(Step S307-9-8)
In step S307-9-8, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the reset prohibition flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-9-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-9.

(Step S307-9-9)
In step S307-9-9, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “60” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter stored in the reset prohibition game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S307-9-9 ends, the selection menu execution process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S307-2 of the mother task.

(Step S307-9-10)
In step S307-9-10, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not reset cancellation has been selected. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for determining whether or not reset cancellation has been selected based on information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415. If it is determined that reset cancellation has been selected (step S307-9-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-9-11, and if it is determined that reset cancellation has not been selected. (Step S307-9-10 = No), the process proceeds to Step S307-9-15.

(Step S307-9-11)
In step S307-9-11, the sub CPU 412 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number backup return process. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 copies the value of the number of bonus ready state transition games stored in the bonus ready state transition game number backup area of the sub RAM 415 to the bonus preparation state transition game number storage area of the sub RAM 415. I do. Then, when the process of step S307-9-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-12.

  Here, in step S307-9-11, the value of the number of bonus ready state transfer games stored in the backup area of the bonus ready state transfer game in the sub RAM 415 is copied to the number of bonus ready state transfer games stored in the sub RAM 415. After that, the process of clearing the Bonus preparation state transition game number backup area may be performed, or the process of clearing the Bonus preparation state transition game number backup area may not be performed. If the process for clearing the Bonus ready state transition game number backup area is not performed, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number backup area is stored as the Bonus ready state transition game number in the process of Step S307-9-11. When the value of the number of bonus preparation state transition games stored in the area is copied to the number of bonus preparation state transition game number backup area provided in the sub RAM 415, the value is deleted.

(Step S307-9-12)
In step S307-9-12, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag. Specifically, a process of turning OFF the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415 is performed. Then, when the process of step S307-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-13.

(Step S307-9-13)
In step S307-9-13, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning off the reset prohibition flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for turning on the value of the reset prohibition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. Then, when the process of step S307-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9-14.

(Step S307-9-14)
In step S307-9-14, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the reset prohibition game number counter stored in the reset prohibition game number storage area provided in the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S307-9-14 ends, the selection menu execution process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S307-2 of the mother task.

(Step S307-9-15)
In step S307-9-15, the sub CPU 412 executes processing corresponding to the selected menu. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 executes processing corresponding to the selected menu based on information stored in the selected menu storage area of the sub RAM 415. When the process of step S307-9-15 ends, the selection menu execution process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S307-2 of the mother task.

  Here, the “process according to the selected menu” is a process other than the process corresponding to the above “history recording game”, “reset”, and “reset cancel”, and in the present embodiment, “ “Character selection”, “Volume adjustment”, “First pachislot course”, “Payout table”, “Return” are provided.

(Character selection)
When “character selection” is selected, control for setting a character is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for setting a character when the information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415 is information related to “character selection”. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for storing information relating to the selected character in the character information storage area of the sub RAM 415. Thereafter, the sub CPU 412 performs control for determining the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the sound output by the speakers 34 and 35 in accordance with the value stored in the character information storage area. In other words, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect according to the selected character.

(Volume adjustment)
When “volume adjustment” is selected, control for adjusting the volume is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adjusting the volume when the information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415 is information related to “volume adjustment”. Then, the sub CPU 412 performs control to determine the volume output from the speakers 34 and 35 based on the adjusted volume.

(First pachislot course)
When “First Pachislot Course” is selected, control is performed to notify the player of the gaming method of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415 is information related to “first pachislot course”, the sub CPU 412 uses the liquid crystal display device 41 and the speakers 34 and 35 to play the gaming machine. Control is performed to notify the player of one game method.

(Dividend table)
When “payout table” is selected, the payout table of the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, when the information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415 is information related to the “payout table”, the sub CPU 412 receives a combination of symbols and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the symbol combination. Etc. are controlled to notify the liquid crystal display device 41 of the above.

(Return)
When “return” is selected, control for terminating display of the menu screen is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 ends the display of the menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 when the information stored in the selection menu storage area of the sub RAM 415 is information related to “return”. Then, the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled to display the image displayed before the menu screen is displayed.

(Timing chart showing whether or not the Bonus ready state transition game number can be reset)
Next, a timing chart indicating whether or not the Bonus ready state transition game number can be reset will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 106 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the power-on command, the reel rotation start acceptance command, and the Bonus ready state transition game number resettable period. FIG. 106 (B) shows the setting change device operation. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a start / end command, a reel rotation start acceptance command, and a Bonus ready state transition game number resettable period. FIG. 106 (C) shows an automatic medal insertion command / medal insertion command and medal insertion. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a cancel command, a reel rotation start reception command, and the resettable period of the number of bonus preparation state transfer games.

  First, the relationship among the power-on command, the reel rotation start acceptance command, and the Bonus ready state transition game count resettable period will be described with reference to FIG.

  106A, the sub CPU 412 receives a power-on command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, it is impossible to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games.

  Next, at the timings of FIGS. 106 (A) (c) to (d), the sub CPU 412 receives a reel rotation start acceptance command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, it is impossible to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games.

  The timings in FIGS. 106A and 106E are the timing when the “60” game is played after the sub CPU 412 receives the power-on command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs control to enable resetting of the number of bonus preparation state transition games based on the value of the reset prohibition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415 becoming “0”. .

  Next, the relationship among the setting change device operation start / end command, the reel rotation start acceptance command, and the Bonus ready state transition game count resettable period will be described with reference to FIG.

  106B, at the timings (a) to (b), the sub CPU 412 receives a setting change device operation start / end command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, it is impossible to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games.

  Next, at the timings of FIGS. 106B and 106C to 106D, the sub CPU 412 receives a reel rotation start acceptance command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, it is impossible to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games.

  The timings of FIGS. 106B and 106E are the timings at which the sub CPU 412 has played the “60” game after receiving the setting change device operation start / end command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. is there. Specifically, the sub CPU 412 performs control to enable resetting of the number of bonus preparation state transition games based on the value of the reset prohibition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 415 becoming “0”. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 412 has the same number of games when it receives a power-on command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 and when it receives a setting change device operation start / end command. During this period, control is performed to make it impossible to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games. Accordingly, when the game store is closed, the player can discriminate between when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the gaming machine is turned on before the game store is opened, and when the setting value is changed. I can't do it.

  Next, based on FIG. 106C, the relationship between the automatic medal insertion command / medal insertion command, the medal insertion cancel command, the reel rotation start acceptance command, and the Bonus ready state transition game number resettable period will be described. .

  106 (C) (a) to (b), the sub CPU 412 receives a medal insertion command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, it is possible to reset the number of bonus preparation state transition games on condition that the settlement button 9 is operated. Therefore, it is impossible to reset the number of bonus preparation state transition games between FIGS. 106 (C) (a) and (b).

  Next, at the timings of FIGS. 106C, 106C, and 106D, the sub CPU 412 receives a medal insertion cancel command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. At this time, the number of Bonus preparation state transition games can be reset.

  Next, at the timings shown in FIGS. 106C (e) to (f), the sub CPU 412 receives a reel rotation start acceptance command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. The sub CPU 412 performs control to make it impossible to reset the number of bonus preparation state transition games at this timing.

  In the present embodiment, even when the sub CPU 412 receives a medal insertion command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300, the bonus preparation state transition game is provided on the condition that the settlement button 9 is operated. The number can be reset, but is not limited to this. For example, when the sub CPU 412 receives a medal insertion command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300, the sub CPU 412 resets the number of Bonus ready state transition games without having to operate the checkout button 9. It may be possible.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs control to transmit a medal insertion cancel command, and the sub CPU 412 can reset the number of bonus preparation state transition games based on the reception of the medal insertion cancel command. However, the main CPU 301 has a medal insertion cancel start command having information to start returning a medal inserted by the player, and a medal insertion cancellation having information to the effect that the return of the medal inserted by the player has ended. The sub CPU 412 performs control to transmit an end command, and the sub CPU 412 determines the number of Bonus ready state transition games based on the reception of either the medal insertion cancel start command or the medal insertion cancel end command transmitted by the main CPU 301. Re Tsu door may be possible to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if the sub CPU 412 receives a medal insertion cancel command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300, the sub CPU 412 receives the medal insertion cancel command, and then the Bonus preparation state transition game. Control is performed so that the number can be reset. Therefore, even if the player operates the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 by mistake, the player can reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games by operating the settlement button 9. .

(Operation of the reel 17 at the time of spinning)
Next, the operation of the reel 17 during the spinning effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111 are diagrams showing the operation of the reel 17 when the spinning effect 03 is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 107A and 107B, the main CPU 301 performs control to swing the reel by rotating the reel 17 in the forward direction for a predetermined time and then rotating it in the reverse direction for a predetermined time. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the right reel 17c in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the middle reel 17b in the forward direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (g), the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the BAR2 symbols 700 in a state where they are aligned. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the reverse direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the forward direction.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 108B, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the left reel 17a. At this time, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the BAR2 symbol 700 at the upper stage and the middle stage. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control for rotating the left reel 17a by one frame in the forward direction and performs control for rotating the right reel 17c by one frame in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a in the reverse direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the left reel 17a. At this time, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the BAR2 symbol 700 at the middle stage and the lower stage. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the middle reel 17b by one frame in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (g), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the middle reel 17b by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (h), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a in the reverse direction.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109A, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the main CPU 301 in a state where the BAR2 symbols 700 are aligned. Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the reverse direction. The rotational speed of the reel 17 at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (c) is slower than the rotational speed of the reel 17 at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (b). Next, as illustrated in FIG. 109 (d), the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the main CPU 301 in a state where the BAR 2 symbols 700 are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the reverse direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (f), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the forward direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (g), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the reverse direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (h), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the forward direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the reverse direction.

  110A, the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the reverse direction, and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the forward direction and performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the BAR2 symbols 700 in an aligned state. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the right reel 17c by one frame in the forward direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the middle reel 17b by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (f), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a by one frame in the forward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (g), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 by one frame in the reverse direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (h), control is performed to stop the BAR2 symbols 700 in an aligned state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 17a and the right reel 17c in the reverse direction, and performs control to rotate the middle reel 17b in the forward direction. Next, in FIG. 111 (b), the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the BAR 2 symbols 700 in an aligned state.

  Here, when the rotation effect 03 is executed, the sub CPU 412 performs control to output a specific music stored in the sound source ROM 432 via the sound source IC 431. The music for the reeling effect 03 stored in the sound source ROM 432 and the operation of the reel 17 are linked. Specifically, when the music is represented in a score, the main CPU 301 is configured to rotate and stop the reel 17 in accordance with notes, rests, clefs, time signatures, key signatures, temporary symbols, and the like. ing. As a result, the spinning effect 03 starts with the output of the music, and the reel 17 rotates and stops according to the note, rest, clef, time signature, key signature, extraordinary symbol, etc. It becomes possible to execute a certain spinning effect.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 111B, the sub CPU 412 may perform control to increase the number of ART games when the BAR2 symbols 700 are aligned and stopped. In this case, the sub CPU 412 may perform control for determining the number of additional games by lottery based on the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 47), or separately provide a table for lottering the number of additional games. You may perform control which determines the number of additional games based on the table which draws the number of additional games provided. Moreover, the timing which determines the number of additional games by lottery can be set suitably. For example, at the timing when the symbol combination related to the BAR replay 02 is stopped on the active line, the number of games to be added by the number of times that the BAR2 symbols 700 are aligned during the turning effect 03 may be determined in advance by lottery.

(Animation at the time of resetting the number of games for transition to the Bonus preparation state)
Next, based on FIGS. 112-115, the animation at the time of the Bonus preparation state transfer game number reset is demonstrated.

  First, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115 will be described.

(Menu image 600)
The menu image 600 is an image for displaying a plurality of menus for the player. The menu image 600 displays an image for allowing a player to select a predetermined menu from a plurality of menus. Further, the menu image 600 displays an image for notifying the player of the character being set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plurality of menus displayed by the menu image 600 are a history recording game image 601, a character selection image 602, a reset image 603, a volume adjustment image 604, a first pachislot lecture image 605, a payout table. An image 606, a return image 607, a reset cancel image 614, and a non-resetable image 615 are referred to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, images for causing the player to select a predetermined menu from among a plurality of menus refer to the determination image 609 and the selection image 610.

  In the present embodiment, the image for notifying the player of the character being set refers to the character image 608 being set.

  Here, the menu image 600 is displayed differently depending on whether reset is possible or not. For example, if the reset is possible, the menu image 600 in FIG. 112A is displayed. On the other hand, if the reset is impossible, the menu image 600 of FIG. 115 (g) is displayed.

  If the reset can be canceled, the image in FIG. 113D is displayed. On the other hand, if the reset cannot be canceled, the image of FIG. 115 (g) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the menu image 600 is displayed, a plurality of images displayed by the selected menu are provided. For example, a Yes image 611, a No image 612, and an image 613 that returns to the top menu correspond to this.

  Therefore, first, each image will be described below.

(History recording game image 601)
The history recording game image 601 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs processing related to the history recording game based on the fact that the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in the state where the cursor position is the history record game image 601. Therefore, the “history record game” is a menu that is selected when the player plays a history record game in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is an image displayed for the player to select a history recording game from the menu.

(Character selection image 602)
The character selection image 602 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs processing related to character selection based on the operation of the effect button 18 detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in a state where the cursor position is the character selection image 602. Therefore, the “character selection” is a menu that is selected when the player selects a character in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character selection image 602 is a character selection image 602. Is an image displayed for selecting character selection from the menu.

(Reset image 603)
The reset image 603 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600 shown in FIG. Here, in a state where the cursor position is the reset image 603, the sub CPU 412 performs processing related to reset based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 18 by the effect button detection switch 18sw. Accordingly, the “reset” is a menu that is selected when the player resets the number of games in transition to the Bonus preparation state in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This is an image displayed for the player to select reset from the menu.

(Volume adjustment image 604)
The volume adjustment image 604 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of adjusting the volume based on the operation of the effect button 18 detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in a state where the cursor position is the volume adjustment image 604. Therefore, the “volume adjustment” is a menu selected when the player adjusts the volume in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The volume adjustment image 604 is the player's adjustment. Is an image displayed for selecting volume adjustment from the menu.

(First pachislot lecture image 605)
The first pachislot lecture image 605 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 notifies the gaming method of the gaming machine 1 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 18 by the effect button detection switch 18sw in the state where the cursor position is the first pachislot lecture image 605. Process. Therefore, the “first pachislot course” is a menu that is selected when the player wants to receive an explanation of the game method in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. An image 605 is an image displayed for the player to select the first pachislot course from the menu.

(Payout table image 606)
The payout table image 606 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for displaying the payout table based on the operation of the effect button 18 detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in a state where the cursor position is the payout table image 606. Accordingly, the “payout table” is a menu selected when the player checks the payout table in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The payout table image 606 is a game table. It is an image displayed for the user to select a payout table from the menu.

(Back image 607)
The return image 607 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600. Here, the sub CPU 412 performs a process of ending the display of the menu image 600 when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in the state of the image 607 where the cursor position returns. Therefore, “return” is a menu selected when the player wants to end the display of the menu screen in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the return image 607 is a game This is an image displayed for the user to select “Return” from the menu.

(Character image 608 being set)
The character image 608 being set is an image for displaying the character selected by “character selection”. Here, the character image 608 being set is displayed to notify the player of the currently selected character. In the present embodiment, the effect determination table provided in the sub ROM 414 is provided with an effect corresponding to the selected character. For this reason, at the time of production execution, the appearance probability of the selected character is increased.

(Decision image 609)
The determination image 609 is an image for notifying whether or not a menu corresponding to the current cursor position can be selected. In addition, the determined image 609 displays an image of the effect button 18 in order to notify the player that the menu or the like corresponding to the current cursor position is determined by operating the effect button 18.

(Selected image 610)
The selection image 610 is an image for prompting a moving operation of the current cursor position. Further, the selection image 610 displays an image of the cross key 19 in order to notify that the cursor is moved by operating the cross key 19. Here, in this embodiment, the current cursor position is displayed in different colors depending on whether it can be moved in the vertical direction or in the case where it can be moved in the horizontal direction. For example, in the menu screen of FIG. 112 (a), in order to indicate that the cursor position can be moved in the vertical direction, the upper and lower keys and the left and right keys in the image of the cross key 19 are displayed in different colors. it's shown. On the other hand, in the screen of FIG. 112 (b), in order to show that the cursor position can be moved in the horizontal direction, the left and right keys and the up and down keys of the image of the cross key 19 are displayed in different colors. doing. FIG. 113 (c) shows that the cursor position cannot be moved on the screen.

(Yes image 611)
The Yes image 611 is an image displayed when a predetermined menu is selected in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the Yes image 611 is an image displayed when, for example, reset is selected from the menu displayed on the menu image 600. Then, in a state where the cursor position is the Yes image 611, when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, it is determined that the process related to the displayed menu is executed.

(No image 612)
The No image 612 is an image displayed when a predetermined menu is selected while the menu image 600 is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the No image 612 is an image that is displayed, for example, when reset is selected from the menu displayed in the menu image 600. If the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in the state where the cursor position is the No image 612, the confirmation of the displayed menu is cancelled.

(Image 613 to return to the top menu)
The image 613 for returning to the top menu is an image that is displayed when a predetermined menu is selected and it is determined that the processing related to the predetermined menu is to be performed in a state where the menu image 600 is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the image 613 that returns to the top menu is an image that is displayed, for example, when it is determined that reset is selected from the menus displayed in the menu image 600. Then, in a state where the image 613 that returns to the top menu is displayed, processing for displaying the menu image 600 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 18 being detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw.

(Reset cancel image 614)
The reset cancel image 614 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600 shown in FIG. Here, in the state where the cursor position is the reset cancel image 614, the sub CPU 412 performs processing related to reset cancellation based on the operation of the effect button 18 being detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. Therefore, “reset cancel” is selected when the player wants to cancel the reset after the player selects the Bonus ready state transition game number reset while the menu image 600 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The reset cancel image 614 is an image that is displayed for the player to select reset cancel from the menu.

(Non-resettable image 615)
The non-resetable image 615 is a part of a plurality of menus displayed on the menu image 600 shown in FIG. Here, the non-resetable image 615 notifies that the player cannot be reset for a predetermined period after the reset is performed by the player. In the present embodiment, the non-resetable image 615 is displayed in a character color different from that of the other menu images, thereby notifying a period during which the reset cannot be performed. Here, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the reset cannot be performed until the game of 60 games is performed after the reset. In the present embodiment, the cursor position does not become the non-resetable image 615, and the upper key of the cross key 19 is operated by the cross key detection switch 19sw when the cursor position is the volume adjustment image 604. When is detected, the cursor position becomes the character selection image 602. On the other hand, when the operation of the lower key of the cross key 19 is detected by the cross key detection switch 19sw in the state where the cursor position is the character selection image 602, the cursor position becomes the volume adjustment image 604.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined period that cannot be reset is the period from the last reset until the game of 60 games is performed, but is not limited to this, and is set as the predetermined period. The number of games since the previous reset is performed can be changed as appropriate. Also, it may be impossible to reset for a predetermined time after the previous reset, or may not be reset until a predetermined winning area is determined by the internal lottery process described above, It is good also as not being able to reset until the combination of the symbol which concerns on the said predetermined winning area is displayed on an active line.

  In the present embodiment, the reset image 603 cannot be selected by displaying the non-resetable image 615. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reset image 603 may not be selected by simply not displaying the reset image 603.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is displayed on the combination effective line of the symbols related to replay, the menu image 600 is displayed even when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw even when it is displayed on the symbol combination effective line related to replay. The menu image 600 may be displayed. Then, when the menu image 600 is displayed, a predetermined menu may be selected from a plurality of menus. For example, even if it is displayed on the combination effective line of symbols related to replay, it is possible to select the reset of the number of games in the Bonus preparation state transition, or to cancel the reset.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display 41 when resetting)
Next, an animation for resetting the number of Bonus preparation state transition games will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in standby mode, when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 112 (a) on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  Next, in a state where the menu image 600 of FIG. 112A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the cursor position is the reset image 603, and the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. In this case, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the image shown in FIG. Here, the sub CPU 412 displays a character image “Would you like to reset?” On the liquid crystal in the image shown in FIG. Control to display on the display device 41 is performed.

  Next, in a state where the image shown in FIG. 112B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the cursor position is the Yes image 611, and the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. In such a case, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the image shown in FIG. Here, in order to notify the player that the reset can be canceled, the sub CPU 412 displays a character image “preparing for reset” in the image shown in FIG. Control is performed to display a character image “can be canceled from the top menu until next game play” on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  Next, when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw in a state where the image shown in FIG. 113C is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the sub CPU 412 Control for displaying the menu image 600 shown in 113 (d) is performed. Here, in the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113D, the reset cancel image 614 is displayed at the position where the reset image 603 is displayed, and the reset is performed while the menu image 600 is displayed. Cancellation can be selected.

  Next, in the case where the player does not cancel the reset, when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw after one game has been played, the sub CPU 412 changes to FIG. 115 (g). Control to display the displayed menu image 600 on the liquid crystal display device 41 is performed. Here, in the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 115G, a non-resetable image 615 is displayed at a position where the reset image 603 is displayed.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display 41 when canceling the reset)
Next, based on FIGS. 113 to 114, an explanation will be given of an animation when canceling the resetting of the number of bonus preparation state transition games.

  Note that until the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113 (d) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the animation is the same as the animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the time of reset, and the description is omitted. .

  When the menu image 600 of FIG. 113D is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the cursor position is the reset cancel image 614, and the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. The sub CPU 412 performs control to display the image shown in FIG. Here, in order to make the player confirm whether or not to cancel the reset, the sub CPU 412 displays the characters “Do you want to cancel the reset?” In the image shown in FIG. 114 (e). Control to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 41 is performed.

  Next, in a state where the image shown in FIG. 114 (e) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the cursor position is the Yes image 611, and the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. In such a case, the sub CPU 412 performs control to display the image shown in FIG. Here, in order to notify the player that the reset has been canceled, the sub CPU 412 displays a character image “reset canceled” on the liquid crystal display device in the image shown in FIG. 41 is controlled.

((Animation displayed on LCD 41 after reset))
Next, based on FIG. 116, the animation when the game is performed after the Bonus ready state transition game number is reset will be described.

  First, since the game number display image 616, the telop image 617, and the post-reset game number display image 618 are displayed in the image shown in FIG. 116, these will be described.

(Game number display image 616)
The game number display image 616 is an image that displays the number of games up to the present after the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed after the Bonus state or ART state ends.

(Ticker image 617)
The telop image 617 is an image that notifies the player that the reset has been performed. Further, in this embodiment, the telop image 617 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 after the reset is performed until 128 games are played after the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, after the reset is performed, the sub CPU 412 resets by the speakers 34 and 35 from when the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 until 128 games are played. By outputting a music for notifying that the reset has been performed, control is performed to notify that the reset has been performed by voice. Specifically, the tone generator ROM 432 stores music data for notifying that the reset has been performed, and the sub CPU 412 resets the tone generator IC 431 based on the reset. After the reset of the music data for notifying that the game has been performed, the speakers 34 and 35 from when the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 until the game of 128 games is played. The command to be output to is set in a predetermined transmission buffer of the sub RAM 415 and output. Then, the sound source IC 431 outputs music for notifying that the reset has been performed via the speakers 34 and 35 based on the reception of the command. Therefore, after the reset is performed, the reset is performed by the telop image 617 and the music for notifying that the reset has been performed from when the start lever 10 is operated until 128 games are played. It is informed that it has been broken.

  In the present embodiment, after the reset is performed, the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 to notify that the reset has been performed until 128 games are played. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a reset is performed, even when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 and before 128 games are performed, the reset is performed when performing a predetermined performance. You may interrupt the output of the music for alert | reporting this. Moreover, based on the completion | finish of the said predetermined production, you may restart the output of the music for alert | reporting that the reset which was interrupted was performed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reset is performed, the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 to notify that the reset has been performed until 128 games are played. The telop image 617 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a reset is performed, even when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 and before 128 games are performed, the reset is performed when performing a predetermined performance. The display of the telop image 617 for notifying this may be interrupted. Further, the display of the suspended telop image 617 may be resumed based on the end of the predetermined effect.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 41 and the speakers 34 and 35 notify that the reset has been performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may alert | report that reset was performed by LED and the lamp | ramp.

  In the present embodiment, after the reset is performed, the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 to notify that the reset has been performed until 128 games are played. However, it is possible to appropriately set the timing for starting the output of the music for notifying that the reset has been performed. For example, it may be after the passage of a medal is detected by the medal sensor 16s, after the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, or after the operation of the 1BET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Alternatively, it may be after the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 is detected by the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw, or after the hopper 520 finishes paying out medals.

  In the present embodiment, after the reset is performed, the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 and notifies the fact that the reset has been performed until 128 games are played. However, it is also possible to appropriately set the timing for terminating the output of the music for notifying that the reset has been performed. For example, after the reset is performed, the music for notifying that the reset has been performed may be output until a predetermined time elapses after the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10. When the predetermined winning area is determined by the internal lottery process described above, or until the combination of symbols relating to the predetermined winning area is displayed on the active line, the fact that the reset has been performed is notified. May output a music for notification that a reset has been performed until a predetermined winning area is determined by the internal lottery process described above, The music for notifying that the reset has been performed may be output until the combination of symbols related to the predetermined winning area is displayed on the active line.

(Game number display image 618 after reset)
The post-reset game number display image 618 is an image that displays the number of games from the reset to the present.

  Next, the time when the image shown in FIG. 116 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

  Note that until the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113 (c) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the animation is the same as that displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the time of reset, and the description thereof is omitted. .

  In the present embodiment, when the image shown in FIG. 116 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, first, the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113C is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. In the state, the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113 (d) is displayed. Displayed when the operation of the effect button 18 is detected by the switch 18sw.

  In addition, when the medal sensor 16s detects passage of a medal in a state where the image illustrated in FIG. 113C is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the image illustrated in FIG. When the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the switch 7sw and when the operation of the 1BET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the display is also made on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  Further, the image shown in FIG. 116 is obtained when the medal passage is detected by the medal sensor 16s in the state where the menu image 600 shown in FIG. 113D is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. When the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, or when the operation of the 1BET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the operation.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the number of Bonus ready state transition games is determined, the sub CPU 412 performs control to reset the number of Bonus ready state transition games. Do. Therefore, even after the period when the probability that the ART transition is allowed is high is over, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. In addition, since the number of Bonus preparation state transition games can be reset by the start switch 10sw until the operation of the start lever 10 is detected, this is the case where the player accidentally operates the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8. However, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter can be reset by operating the settlement button 9.

  In addition, for a player who resets the number of games for transition to the Bonus preparation state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 3000 games) are played after a combination of symbols related to blanks is displayed after the Bonus state or ART state ends. Based on this, control for shifting to the Bonus preparation state may be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who continuously resets the number of games for transition to the Bonus preparation state does not enter the Bonus preparation state even though the player has played for a long time. Further, a player who continues to reset the number of Bonus preparation state transition games can grasp a predetermined number of games (for example, 3000 games) from the game number display image 616.

  In this embodiment, the number of Bonus preparation state transition games is reset by selecting a menu related to “reset” from the menu image 600, but is not limited to this and can be selected as appropriate. It is. For example, when the number of medals used in one game is a predetermined number (for example, two) and the game continues for a plurality of games (for example, four games), the number of Bonus preparation state transition games may be reset. The Bonus preparation state transition game number may be reset based on the operation of the settlement button 9 being detected by the settlement switch 9sw.

  In the present embodiment, the ART is illustrated and described in a specific state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to adopt AT as the specific state. In this case, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of RT gaming states, the capacity of the main ROM 302 can be reduced. Further, in the general gaming state that is relatively unfavorable for the player, the winning probability of the replay is set to the winning probability of the replaying of the RT3 gaming state in this embodiment, so that the player is in the ART gaming state. Can show. Here, in this embodiment, after the symbol combination related to the preparation replay is displayed on the active line, the medal can be increased until the symbol combination related to the red 7 replay or follow replay is displayed on the active line. Although it is not ART, if the above-mentioned AT operates, the AT is adopted as the specific state, and the winning probability of the replay is set to the winning probability of the replay of the RT3 gaming state in the present embodiment, so that from the next game An increase in medals can be expected. Moreover, even if it is not set as the winning probability of the replay of the RT3 gaming state in the present embodiment, the winning area determination table in which the winning probability of a specific internal winning combination (for example, push order bell) is relatively high in the general gaming state If a lottery is performed using, the increase in medals can be expected from the next game.

  In the present embodiment, the ART is illustrated and described in a specific state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific state may be BB, RB, CB, or MB. In this case, when BB, RB, CB, or MB is determined as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 indicates that BB, RB, CB, or MB is determined as the internal winning combination in the main RAM 303. Is a so-called stock machine that can control the combination of symbols related to BB, RB, CB, or MB on the effective line based on the control for storing the information of the game and the game of the predetermined number of games being performed. Is preferable.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 determines again the number of Bonus preparation state transition games based on the fact that a predetermined operation such as the effect button 18 is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. When BB, RB, CB, or MB is adopted as the state, in the state where the player's medal is not credited, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, the MAXBET button 8sw is used. When the operation of the adjustment button 9 is detected by the adjustment switch 9sw, the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw, the operation of the left stop button 11 is performed by the left stop switch 11sw. If detected, the intermediate stop When the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the switch 12sw, or when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, the operation is detected as BB, RB, CB, or MB. It is conceivable to perform control to determine again the number of games until it is permitted to align such symbol combinations on the active line.

  Further, when BB, RB, CB, or MB is adopted as the specific state, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw while the reel 17 is rotating, the MAXBET button is swung by the MAXBET switch 8sw. When the operation of 8 is detected, when the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw, or when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw, it relates to BB, RB, CB, or MB. It is conceivable to perform control to determine again the number of games until the combination of symbols is allowed to be aligned on the active line.

  In addition, although the state where the player's medal is not credited and the state where the reel 17 is rotating are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a combination of symbols related to BB, RB, CB, or MB The timing for performing control to determine again the number of games until it is allowed to be aligned on the active line can be changed as appropriate.

  When the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, when the operation of the payment button 9 is detected by the payment switch 9sw, the start switch 10sw is detected. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop switch 13sw is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a combination of symbols related to BB, RB, CB, or MB is on the effective line. To re-determine the number of games until it is allowed to match Reset dedicated button of it is also possible to provide a. In this case, the switch for detecting the operation of the reset dedicated button is connected to the relay board 200 and outputs a signal indicating that the operation of the reset dedicated button is detected to the main control board 300.

  In the present embodiment, the number of Bonus preparation state transition games is determined again based on detection of a predetermined operation of the effect button 18 and the cross key 19 and operation of the start lever 10. The present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described reset dedicated button is provided, and when the reset dedicated button is operated and the start lever 10 is operated, control is performed to determine the number of Bonus ready state transition games again. Also good. In this case, the switch that detects the operation of the reset dedicated button is connected to the sub control board 400 and outputs a signal to the sub control board 400 that the operation of the reset dedicated button has been detected.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c constitute the reel of the present application.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the display window 21 comprises the symbol display means of this application.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute start operation detection means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, the reel control board 100 that controls the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, and the main CPU 301 constitute the symbol variation means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 and the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw constitute stop operation detecting means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the reel rotation processing constitutes the stop control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the display determination process constitutes the determination unit of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the speakers 34 and 35, the liquid crystal display device 41, and the start lever effect lamp 42 constitute game information notification means of the present application. .

  In the present embodiment, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the speakers 34 and 35, the liquid crystal display device 41, the sub-control board 400 for controlling the start lever effect lamp 42, and a general-purpose board. 38 constitutes game information notification control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, normal (after Bonus), normal (after ART), self-releasing mode, Bonus state, Bonus state during ART, ART game, ART game number determination state, ART game number addition state, Bonus preparation state The sub-control board 400 to be controlled constitutes the specific state control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 that performs the process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter for each game constitutes the game number counting means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 412 that performs the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination process constitutes the specific state allowable game number determination means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18, the effect button detection switch 18sw, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute the operation detection means of the present application.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 412 that performs the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table selection process and the Bonus preparation state transition game number re-determination process constitutes the specific state allowable game number re-determination means of the present application. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, although the game machine used for a spinning-reel game machine (slot machine) was demonstrated, you may use for a pachinko game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, and an arrange ball game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Cabinet 2a Hinge mechanism 3 Front door 4 Keyhole 5a, 5b Side lamp 6 Medal slot 7 1BET button 7sw 1BET switch 8 MAX-BET button 8sw MAX-BET switch 9 Settlement button 9sw Settlement switch 10 Start lever 10sw Start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 middle stop button 12sw middle stop switch 13 right stop button 13sw right stop switch 14 stop button unit 15 return button 16 selector 16s medal sensors 17a to 17c left reel, middle reel, right reel 17d reel unit 18 effect button 18sw effect button detection switch 19 cross key 19sw cross key detection switch 20 panel 21 display windows 22a-22j effect lamp 23 start lamp 24a 24c BET lamp 25 Accumulated number indicator 26a-26b Game status indicator lamp 27 Discharged number indicator 28 Receivable indicator lamp 29 Re-game indicator lamp 30a-30c Stop operation sequence indicator lamp 31 Lumbar panel 32 Receptacle unit 33 Medal payout port 34a, 34b Lower speaker 35a, 35b Upper speaker 36 Setting display section 37 Setting change button 37sw Setting change switch 38 General-purpose board 41 Liquid crystal display device 42 Start lever effect lamp 100 Reel control boards 101-103 Stepping motor 111s Left reel sensor 112s Middle reel sensor 113s Right reel sensor 200 Relay board 300 Main control board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Random number generator 305 I / F circuit 400 Sub control board 410 Production control board 411 I / F circuit 412 Sub CPU
413 Random number generator 414 Sub ROM
415 Sub RAM
420 Image Control Board 421 Image Control Unit (VDP)
422a Liquid crystal control CPU
422b LCD control ROM
422c Liquid crystal control RAM
422d Frame counter 422d1 Initialization processing unit 422d2 Production time information storage unit 422d3 Update processing control unit 422d4 Reading control unit 422d5 Interrupt signal detection unit 422d6 Timing control unit 422d7 Count information storage unit 423 CGROM
424 Crystal oscillator 425 VRAM
426 RTC device 426a Crystal oscillator (crystal oscillator)
426b RTC counter value update unit 426c Information holding unit 426d Time information storage unit (register)
430 Sound control board 431 Sound source IC
432 Sound source ROM
433 video RAM
434 Amplifier 500 Power supply board 510 Power supply device 511 Power button 511sw Power switch 512 Reset button 512sw Reset switch 520 Hopper 521 Discharge slit 522 Hopper guide member 523 Guide member 524 Discharge guide member 530 Auxiliary storage portion full sensor 600 Menu image 601 History record game image 602 Character selection image 603 Reset image 604 Volume adjustment image 605 First pachislot lecture image 606 Payout table image 607 Return image 608 Character image 609 being set Determination image 610 Selection image 611 Yes image 612 No image 613 Return to top menu Image 614 Reset cancel image 615 Image that cannot be reset 616 Number of games display image 617 Telop image 618 Set after the game the number of display image 700 BAR2 pattern

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each circumferential surface;
Among the plurality of symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
Based on the fact that the start operation by the player is detected by the start operation detecting means, a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination;
A symbol changing means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the player by the start operation detecting means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
A stop that performs stop control of the symbol variably displayed by the symbol variation means based on the fact that the stop operation by the player has been detected by the stop operation detection means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means Control means;
Determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed based on the fact that the display of variation of the plurality of symbols is all stopped by the stop control means;
Game information notifying means for notifying information relating to a game;
Game information notification control means for controlling the game information notification means;
A specific state control means for controlling a specific state in which information related to the specific winning combination is notified when a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means;
A game number counting means for counting the number of games;
The number of games until the transition to the specific state controlled by the specific state control means is allowed is determined based on a specific state allowable game number determination table in which a plurality of games until the transition to the specific state is defined. Specific state allowable number-of-games determining means to perform,
Operation detecting means for detecting a predetermined operation by the player;
A game until the transition to the specific state determined by the specific state allowable number-of-games determining unit is permitted based on the fact that a predetermined operation by the player is detected by the operation detecting unit during non- game Specific state allowable game number provisional deciding means for provisionally deciding to decide the number again;
In the state where it is provisionally determined that the number of games until the transition to the specific state is allowed to be determined again by the specific state allowable number-of-games temporary determination unit, the start operation detection unit starts the game by the player Based on the fact that the cancel operation is detected by the operation detection means before the operation is detected, the number of games until the transition to the specific state is allowed by the specific state allowable game number temporary determination means is again determined. Canceling means for canceling the provisional decision to decide,
In the state where the number of games until the transition to the specific state is allowed is tentatively determined by the specific state allowable number-of-games temporary determining unit, the start operation by the player is detected by the start operation detecting unit. Based on this, the specific state is based on the specific state allowable game number redetermination table that is different from the specific state allowable game number determination table and in which a plurality of games are required to enter the specific state. Specific state allowable number-of-games redetermining means for re-determining the number of games until transition to the state is permitted
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: